Date post: | 22-Oct-2014 |
Category: |
Documents |
Upload: | alexandros-gi |
View: | 99 times |
Download: | 4 times |
Allplan 2005 EngineeringManual
Getting Started
This documentation has been produced with the utmost care.
Nemetschek AG and the program authors have no liability to the purchaser or any other entity, with respect to anyliability, loss, or damage caused, directly or indirectly by this software, including but not limited to, any interruptions ofservice, loss of business, anticipatory profits, or consequential damages resulting from the use or operation of thissoftware. Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Companies, names and data used in examples are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part of this document may bereproduced or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the expresswritten permission of Nemetschek AG.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT® and IntelliMouse® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.BAMTEC® is a registered trademark of Häussler, KemptenMicroStation® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc.DXF™, 3D Studio MAX® and AutoCAD® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Autodesk Inc. San Rafael, CA.Parts of this product were developed using LEADTOOLS.(c) 1991-2000, LEAD Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.Allcad®, Allplan® and Allplot® are registered trademarks of Nemetschek AG, Munich.Allfa® is a registered trademark of Nemetschek CREM Solutions GmbH, Munich.
All other (registered) trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
©Nemetschek Technology GmbH, Munich, 2005. All rights reserved.
3rd edition, April 2005
Document No. 050eng01m03-3-PSHGMR0305
Manual Contents I
ContentsWelcome ......................................................................................... 1
Introduction............................................................................................................2
Sources of Information .......................................................................................3Documentation for Allplan 2005..............................................................................3
Additional help................................................................................................................4
Training, Coaching and Project Support........................................................5
Installation..................................................................................... 7Installation Documentation ...............................................................................7
Requirements..........................................................................................................8
Preliminary Considerations Prior to Installing.......................................... 10Data structure............................................................................................................... 10
First-time Installation on a Standalone Workstation ............................. 12
First-time Network Installation ..................................................................... 14
Unit 1: Basics ..............................................................................15User Interface ...................................................................................................... 16
Toolbars........................................................................................................................... 17
Shortcut menu.............................................................................................................. 22
Dialog line ...................................................................................................................... 23
Status bar ....................................................................................................................... 23
Orientation in the Program – The Modules ............................................... 24
Working with Projects, Drawing Files and Layers .................................... 26Using NDW-format files in Allplan ....................................................................... 27
Using the Mouse................................................................................................. 29Table 1: no tool is activated .................................................................................... 30
Table 2: a drafting tool is activated (e.g. for drawing a line) ..................... 31
Table 3: an edit tool is activated (e.g. for deleting) ....................................... 32
II Contents Allplan 2005
Controlling the Display on Screen................................................................ 33
Display Sequence................................................................................................ 35Sequence in which elements are displayed on screen................................... 35
The ‘Sequence‘ element property.......................................................................... 36
Values for the ‘Sequence’ element property..................................................... 36
Modifying the display sequence............................................................................ 38
Activating and Quitting Tools ........................................................................ 39Activating tools............................................................................................................ 39
Executing tools............................................................................................................. 39
Quitting tools................................................................................................................ 39
The Wizard............................................................................................................ 40
Correcting Errors ................................................................................................ 41
Saving Your Work .............................................................................................. 42
Defining Pen Thickness, Linetype and Line Color..................................... 44
Modifying Pen Thickness, Linetype and Line Color ................................. 45
Using the Clipboard........................................................................................... 46
Using OLE Objects .............................................................................................. 49Linking and embedding OLE objects .................................................................... 49
Linking and embedding bitmaps as OLE objects.............................................. 50
Transparency of OLE objects ................................................................................... 50
Editing OLE objects..................................................................................................... 51
Using XRefs .......................................................................................................... 52Editing XRefs................................................................................................................. 52
Restrictions .................................................................................................................... 53
Selecting Elements, Overview......................................................................... 54Selecting elements by entering a region............................................................ 55
Selecting and editing elements using handles................................................. 56
Working with the Advanced Point Entry.................................................... 57Dialog............................................................................................................................... 58
Entering points based on point snap and offset entry ................................. 64
Adjusting the options ................................................................................................ 65
Manual Contents III
Precision Drawing .............................................................................................. 67Entering length values and coordinates ............................................................. 67
Displaying coordinates .............................................................................................. 69
Point snap ...................................................................................................................... 70
Using CursorTips........................................................................................................... 71
Point Assistant toolbar .............................................................................................. 74
Setting a cursor snap angle and using drawing aids ..................................... 76
Using the bracket feature ........................................................................................ 77
Polyline entry tools..................................................................................................... 78
Applying Hatching, Patterns or Fills............................................................. 79
Hatching and Reference Scale ....................................................................... 81Same as in plan’ hatching setting ......................................................................... 82
‘Scale-based adjustment in plan’ hatching setting......................................... 83
Pattern and Reference Scale........................................................................... 84‘Constant as in layout’ pattern setting................................................................ 85
‘Scale-based adjustment in plan’ pattern setting ........................................... 86
Working Efficiently Using Libraries, Favorites and Defaults................. 87Default settings............................................................................................................ 87
Saving components as favorites ............................................................................ 88
Using symbols ............................................................................................................... 89
Using smart symbols................................................................................................... 90
Paths in Allplan 2005................................................................................................. 94
IV Contents Allplan 2005
Unit 2: First Steps ...................................................................... 95Overview of Exercises........................................................................................ 96
Initial Settings for Exercises 1 and 2 ........................................................... 97Dynamic toolbar .......................................................................................................... 97
Engineering configuration....................................................................................... 97
Understanding drawing files.................................................................................101
Drawing file status....................................................................................................102
Information on the active drawing file ............................................................103
Exercise 1: Title Block .....................................................................................105Designing the title block ........................................................................................106
Entering text for the title block ..........................................................................113
Saving and retrieving the title block as a symbol in a catalog................121
Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit .................................................................126Designing the precast balcony unit....................................................................127
Dimensioning the precast balcony unit ............................................................140
Applying hatching to the precast balcony unit and making a quickprintout.........................................................................................................................150
Troubleshooting................................................................................................158What do I do when …?............................................................................................158
What if.. ........................................................................................................................158
Manual Contents V
Unit 3: Project Organization................................................. 159What is ProjectPilot?................................................................................................160
ProjectPilot’s user interface...................................................................................161
Common approaches in ProjectPilot..................................................................162
Using Layers .......................................................................................................166Understanding layers ...............................................................................................166
Defining the layer on which to design..............................................................166
Setting the format properties of layers ............................................................167
Layer access rights.....................................................................................................168
Setting layer visibility ..............................................................................................169
Managing layers and layer structures................................................................170
Advantages of organizing data using layers ...................................................170
Relationship between layers and drawing files..............................................171
Layer hierarchy...........................................................................................................172
Using design groups .................................................................................................173
Using layer sets...........................................................................................................174
Creating a Project ............................................................................................175
Creating a Fileset..............................................................................................177
Tips on Project Organization ........................................................................180
Setting Up Layers .............................................................................................181Defining layer sets.....................................................................................................183
Training project on the Internet ..........................................................................188
VI Contents Allplan 2005
Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing .................................189Overview of Exercises......................................................................................190
Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement ............................................................192Creating the 3D model using the Walls, Openings, Components module.........................................................................................................................................193
Settings .........................................................................................................................194
Walls...............................................................................................................................195
Views and viewports.................................................................................................208
Columns ........................................................................................................................212
Beam ..............................................................................................................................215
Openings.......................................................................................................................217
Design check ...............................................................................................................225
Dimensioning ..............................................................................................................227
Turning layers on and off.......................................................................................228
Stair outline ................................................................................................................230
Slab.................................................................................................................................233
Drawing the walls in the basement in 2D with the Draft module..........240
Exercise 4: Elevator Pit ...................................................................................250Creating the 3D model with the 3D Modeling module ..............................251
Component modeler ................................................................................................259
Creating the 3D model using the Walls, Openings, Components module.........................................................................................................................................262
Unit 5: Key Plan........................................................................267Exercise 5: Key Plan for the Basement......................................................268
Manual Contents VII
Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing........................................... 279Overview of Exercises......................................................................................280
Initial Settings ...................................................................................................284
Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) ........................285Shell entities / views and sections.......................................................................287
Edge reinforcement of the floor slab ................................................................298
Area reinforcement of the floor slab.................................................................312
Starter bars ..................................................................................................................318
Wall reinforcement...................................................................................................326
Typical section ............................................................................................................340
Bar schema...................................................................................................................345
Reinforcement schedule and bending schedule ............................................347
Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method)......................353Designing a reinforced door lintel ......................................................................354
Modifying the door lintel.......................................................................................364
Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method)................................369Mesh reinforcement, bottom layer.....................................................................370
Recess.............................................................................................................................375
Support reinforcement / spacers .........................................................................380
Cutting diagram / excess reinforcing steel mesh ..........................................385
Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement..........................................................389
Cross-Section Catalogs...................................................................................405
Unit 7: Layout Output............................................................ 411Requirements for Plotting.............................................................................412
Making a quick printout .........................................................................................412
Exercise 10: Custom Title Block ...................................................................413
Exercise 11: Plot Layout.................................................................................420Assembling the layout .............................................................................................420
Plotting layouts..........................................................................................................425
Layout windows .........................................................................................................427
VIII Contents Allplan 2005
Unit 8: Data Import .................................................................429General Information........................................................................................430
Importing Allplan Data...................................................................................430Compressed data .......................................................................................................431
Importing DXF/DWG/DGN Files....................................................................433
Further Processing ...........................................................................................436
Index............................................................................................437
Manual Welcome 1
WelcomeWelcome to Allplan 2005, the high-performance CADprogram for civil engineers.
This manual is designed to give you a quick andpractical introduction to Allplan 2005.
You will find that within a short time, you will be in aposition to use Allplan 2005 effectively in your dailywork.
This chapter covers the following:
� An overview of the contents of this manual
� Documentation for Allplan 2005
� Additional help on Allplan 2005
� Where to turn for training, coaching and projectsupport
2 Introduction Allplan 2005
IntroductionThis manual consists of three sections:
• Documentation on installing Allplan 2005
• An introduction to basic concepts of and navigation in theprogram
• A tutorial which guides you from initial 2D drafting to the fullyautomatic creation and management of a reinforcement drawingin 3D. The tutorial consists of 11 exercises, which are divided into8 units.The tutorial will provide you with a sound introduction to Allplan2005. As the tutorial only touches on the possibilities of some ofthe tools, please consult – especially later when you work withAllplan 2005 – the F1 online Help as an important source ofinformation.
• The data used in this tutorial can be downloaded from theInternet. More information is provided at the end of Unit 3,“Project Organization”.
This manual also assumes that you have a working knowledge ofMicrosoft® Windows® programs. Following this manual will provideboth the experienced CAD user as well as newcomers to CAD with asolid foundation in the methods and approach employed by Allplan2005.
Manual Welcome 3
Sources of Information
Documentation for Allplan 2005
The Allplan 2005 documentation consists of the following:
• The online Help is the main source of information for learningabout and working with Allplan 2005.While you work with Allplan 2005, you can get help on thecurrent function by pressing the F1 key, or activate Help onthe Standard toolbar and point to the icon on which you requirehelp.
• The manual consists of three parts. The first part shows you howto install Allplan 2005. The second part provides an overview ofbasic concepts and terms as well as methods for entering data inAllplan 2005. The third part contains a tutorial in which allfunctions are described in detail using a step-by-step approach.You will learn how to efficiently generate key, formwork andreinforcement drawings. With easy to follow steps, you will beguided from initial 2D drafting to fully automatic reinforcementdrawings in three-dimensional space.
• The brochure New Features in Allplan 2005 providesinformation on what's new in the latest version.
• Each volume in the Step-by-Step series deals with a specificconcept or series of tools/modules in Allplan 2005 in detail. Theareas covered include data management, system administration,geodesy modules, presentation tools, 3D modeling etc. Theseguides can also be obtained from the Nemetschek trainingdepartment:
Nemetschek Deutschland GmbHCampus Center MunichKonrad-Zuse-Platz 181829 MunichGermany
Phone: (0 18 01) 75 00 00Fax: (0 18 01) 75 00 01
4 Sources of Information Allplan 2005
Additional help
Tips for efficient usage
The Help menu contains the Tips for efficient usage item. This topicprovides an overview of important tips and tricks.
User boardUser board provided in our ServicePlus Portal: thousands of usersexchange their knowledge. Register now:http://serviceplus.nemetschek.de
LineLetter
The LineLetter is a publication that appears several times a year. It issent in digital form free of charge to ServicePlus customers. TheLineLetter includes practical tips and tricks on all program areas.
FAQs on the Internet
Up-to-date FAQ’s are available on the Internet at the followingaddress:
http://www.nemetschek.de/faq
Note: You can also get this address right from the program. On theHelp menu, point to Nemetschek in the Internet and click FAQs.
Feedback on the Help
If you have suggestions or questions on the online Help, or if youcome across an error, send an e-mail to:
Note: You can also get this address right from the online Help. To dothis, go to the Allplan menu and click Help Feedback.
Manual Welcome 5
Training, Coaching and Project SupportThe type of training you are given is a decisive factor in the amountof time you actually spend working on your own projects: Aprofessional introduction to the programs and advanced seminars foradvanced users can save you up to 35% of your editing time!
A tailor-made training strategy is essential. Nemetschek’s seminarcenters offer an extensive range of programs and are happy to workout a custom solution with you that will address your own needs andrequirements:
• Our sophisticated, comprehensive seminar program is thequickest way for professional users to learn how to use the newsystem.
• Special seminars are designed for users who wish to extend andoptimize their knowledge.
• One-on-one seminars are best when it comes to addressing yourown particular methods of working.
• One-day crash courses, designed for office heads, convey theessentials in a compact format.
• We are also happy to hold seminars on your premises: Theseencompass not only Allplan 2005 issues but include analysis andoptimization of processes and project organization.
The up-to-date seminar guide is available on the Internet:
www.nemetschek.de/campus
For more detailed information on the current training program,please contact the Nemetschek Campus in Munich:
Phone: (0 18 01) 75 00 00Fax: (0 18 01) 75 00 01
6 Training, Coaching and Project Support Allplan 2005
A request:
We are always trying to improve the overall quality of our programdocumentation. Your comments and suggestions are important to usand we welcome feedback on the manuals and on-line help.
Please do not hesitate to contact us to express criticism or praiseconcerning the documentation. Feel free to contact us as follows:
Documentation
Nemetschek Technology GmbHKonrad-Zuse-Platz 181829 MunichGermany
Phone: (0 18 01) 75 00 00Fax: (0 18 01) 75 00 01Email: [email protected]
Manual Installation 7
Installation
Installation DocumentationDocumentation of installing Allplan 2005 can be found in anumber of places:
• The manual describes the procedure for a first-time installation ata standalone workstation and covers the essentials for first-timeinstallation in a network.
• The Allplan 2005 CD contains an install.hlp file whichprovides more, up-to-date and detailed information on installingand upgrading (at a standalone workstation and in a network).We strongly recommend that you read this file before installing.
8 Requirements Allplan 2005
Requirements
Hardware requirements
The following table lists the minimum requirements for runningAllplan 2005:
• INTEL Pentium III (at least 1 GHz) or compatible
• 256 MB RAM (without display list)
• 1 GB free hard disk space + 100 MB on the system drive
• CD-ROM drive (for the installation)
• 1 parallel or USB port for the hardlock
• Graphics board, resolution 1024 x 768
• 19-inch monitor 1024 x 768
• Network card (only for network operation)
• 3-button mouse
• Floppy disk drive, connection to network or email (for installingthe license)
Software requirements
• Allplan 2005 runs on the following operating systems:
- Windows XP Professional / Home, Service Pack 2
- Windows 2000, Service Pack 4
- Windows Server 2003
• In addition to the operating systems mentioned above, Allplan2005 file servers run on the following operating systems:
- Novell NetWare 6.5 with NetWare Services
- Suse Linux 9.1 with Samba server 3.0 based on Reiser filesystem
Important: Please check that all workstations are running one ofthese operating systems.
Manual Installation 9
Notes:
- For professional performance, we recommend Windows XPProfessional or Windows 2000. Other operating systems suchas Linux, HP-UX or MacIntosh have not been tested by us.Please bear in mind that Allplan 2005 does not run on theseoperating systems (the same applies for file servers). We donot provide any support for these installations.
• Internet Explorer 4.01 or higher
Further requirements
Please note the following if you have installed a new operatingsystem (e.g. Windows XP).
• The operating system must already be installed and running.
• The hardware and software requirements mentioned above alsoapply to computers which serve as data servers for an Allplan2005 installation.
• All peripheral devices must be connected and correctlyconfigured.
• When you install two or more Allplan 2005 workstations in anetwork, it is essential that these workstations are networkedcorrectly.
• When you are working in a network, you need to install Allplan2005 on all the networked workstations before you can resumeyour work.Please note the following:
- You can only install Allplan 2005 when you have a validServicePlus contract - and thus a license file - for theworkstation in question.
- You cannot use a Allplan 2005 together with earlier Allplanversions or data thereof!
10 Preliminary Considerations Prior to Installing Allplan 2005
Preliminary Considerations Prior to Installing
Data structure
There are two types of Allplan 2005 data:
• Program files: these files are always installed locally on everyworkstation.
• Central file storage: projects and office standard, for example.This data can be installed locally or on a file server.
Prior to installing, decide on the folder in which you want theprogram to be installed as this can only be altered later byuninstalling and re-installing.
It is a good idea to keep the data files and program files in separate,central locations. This will facilitate backup operations later.
Central file storage when installing in a network
When installing in a network, the folder for the central file storage orthe drive where this folder is located must be shared for all theworkstations on which Allplan 2005 is to be installed.This also applies when installing with Workgroup Manager when thecentral file storage is located on the workstation to be installed. Inthis case, too, the central file storage must be in a folder under ashare.
Example:
You want to use the Allplan folder for the central file storage.
The Allplan folder is shared. When installing with workgroupmanager, you cannot use this folder as the central file storage as thefolder is not located under a share.
Manual Installation 11
The Projects folder is shared. Installing with Workgroup Manager ispossible as the Allplan folder is located under a share.
Note: To find out how to share folders ands drives, consult the onlineHelp system for the operating system you are running.
12 First-time Installation on a Standalone Workstation Allplan 2005
First-time Installation on a StandaloneWorkstation
Allplan’s installation program allows you to install Allplan 2005quickly and easily.
To install a standalone version of Allplan 2005 for thefirst time
� Read the following before installing:
• Requirements for installing and running Allplan 2005
• Preliminary considerations
1 Close any applications that are running, shutdown the computerand turn it off.
2 Connect the hardlock to the parallel or USB port.
If you are using several programs that require hardlocks, checkthat the Allplan 2005 hardlock is first in the chain, followed bythe hardlocks for the other programs.
3 Turn on all the peripheral devices.
4 Turn on the computer and boot.
5 Log on as Administrator for the local machine or as a user withadministrator privileges.
6 Insert the Allplan 2005 CD in the CD-ROM drive.
Setup should start automatically. If it doesn't, click Start on thetask bar, select Run and enter the drive letter of the CD-ROMdrive followed by the pathname and setup. For example, entere:\setup.
7 Select a language for Setup and press OK to confirm.
8 Press Next to acknowledge the Welcome screen.
9 The terms of the software license agreement are displayed in theSoftware License Agreement dialog box. If you agree to theterms of the agreement, click Yes.
Manual Installation 13
10 The Important Information dialog box provides information onthe documentation of installing Allplan. Press F1 to read it.Otherwise, click Next.
11 In the Installation Option dialog box select First-timeinstallation or First-time installation with data transfer. Thenclick Next.
12 In the Select License Information dialog box select the drive withthe license file.If you are using a license disk, insert it in the floppy disk drive.Then click Next.
13 Select the drive where the Allplan 2005 programs and files are tobe installed.
Program folder: this is where the Allplan 2005 program files areinstalled.
Central file storage folder: this is where the data files (e.g.,projects, office standard) are stored.
14 In the Setup Type dialog box select the desired mode. Then clickNext.
Typical: installs all the common options. This is the recommendedsetting.
Compact: only installs the essential program and files.
Custom: installs the files you specify. By default, all componentsare enabled. Deactivate the component(s) you do not want toinstall in the Select Components dialog box.
15 In the Select Program Folder dialog box, specify the programfolder where the symbols for Allplan 2005 are to be installed.
16 Check the settings in the Start Copying dialog box. If the settingsare OK, click Next to start the installation.
17 It can happen that you will now be prompted to restart thecomputer. Log on as Administrator for the local machine or as auser with administrator privileges again.
14 First-time Network Installation Allplan 2005
First-time Network Installation• Before you install the program, please read the
\Helpfiles\English\install.hlp file on the Allplan 2005 CD and thechapter “Requirements for Running Allplan 2005".
• The folder for the central file storage or the drive where thisfolder is located must be shared for all the workstations on whichAllplan 2005 is to be installed.This also applies when installing with Workgroup Manager whenthe central file storage is located on the workstation to beinstalled. In this case, too, the central file storage must be in afolder under a share.
• Select the same folder for all workstations. This folder will serveas the central file storage and will ensure that all workstationshave access to the same data.
• If you are using Workgroup Manager, it must be installed on allthe workstations in the network. It is not possible to have someworkstations with Workgroup Manager and some without.
To install for the first time in a network
1 Install Allplan 2005 on all workstations as described in first-timeinstallation on a standalone workstation.
2 Check every workstation to see whether Allplan 2005 startscorrectly.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 15
Unit 1: BasicsThis unit provides information on navigating Allplan2005 and the basic structure of the program.
This chapter covers the following:
� User interface
� Modular structure of Allplan 2005
� Working with projects, drawing file, layers andNDW-format files
� Mouse button assignments
� Activating and quitting tools
� Using the wizard
� Using the shortcut menu
� Correcting errors
� Saving your work
� Defining and modifying format properties
� Using the Clipboard
� OLE objects and XRefs
� Selecting elements
� Advanced point entry
� Precision drawing
� Entering polylines and areas
� Applying hatching, pattern, fill
� Working efficiently using libraries and defaults
� Using smart symbols
16 User Interface Allplan 2005
User Interface
Basics toolbar
This toolbar includes all the basic tools. These aretools that you will require time and again andmodule-specific tools which differ according tothe selected module. The tools are arranged inflyouts.
Configuration toolbars
This toolbar includes the most important toolsfrom the Architecture, Engineering, Landscapingand City Planning module.The tools are arranged in flyouts.
Buttons in the viewport border
The border at the bottom of each viewport includesmultiple buttons which you can use to control theon-screen display.
Title bar
The title bar of Allplan’s application windowshows the current project, current fileset andcurrent drawing file.
Menu bar
All the tools found in the toolbars can beactivated via the menus.
Status bar
Various types of information on the current drawingare displayed here – e.g., the reference scale and unitof length.
Filter Assistant toolbar
The Filter Assistant toolbar includes tools to assistyou in the process of finding and selectingelements. These tools are always active.
Edit toolbar
This toolbar includes the most importanttools for editing and modifying elementsin Allplan.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 17
Toolbars
Toolbars contain icons that you can use to execute functions.Positioning the cursor over an icon displays a ToolTip with a shortdescription of the function.
Toolbars can be arranged around the edge of the workspace (this isthe default) or made to float anywhere on your screen. To float atoolbar, click the top border of the toolbar or its edge, press and holddown the left mouse button, and drag the toolbar into the workspace.
To protect the toolbars from being moved inadvertently, go to theView menu, point to Toolbars and click Fix toolbars.
Basic Tools toolbar
Draft flyout
Text flyout
Dim. Line flyout
Plan flyout
Edit flyout
CAD Navigator
Create flyout
Create II flyout
Modify flyout
Basi
c to
ols
(alw
ays
avai
labl
e)M
odul
e-sp
ecifi
cto
ols
The top half of this toolbar includes all the important tools. Theseare tools that you will require time and again – for example,drafting, text, dimensioning and edit tools. These tools are alwaysavailable in this form in all the modules.
18 User Interface Allplan 2005
The bottom half includes the tool for accessing the CAD Navigator aswell as module-specific tools in the Create, Create II and Modifyflyouts. The contents of this flyout change depending on whichmodule is open (in this example: Draft module).
Note: An empty icon is displayed when the Create II or Modifyflyouts do not contain any tools.
Configuration toolbars
Architecture configuration
Roofs and Planes flyout
Archit. Component flyout
Archit. Openings flyout
Rooms flyout
Stairs flyout
Rafter Design flyout
3D Modification flyout
Engineering configuration
Model flyout
Enter Bending Shape + Placement flyout
Area Reinforcement flyout
Area Reinforcement (Mesh) flyout
BAMTEC flyout
Display flyout
Modify flyout
Lists/Schedules flyout
Allplan 2005 has several standard configurations. Access to the mostimportant tools for a specific discipline is provided in each of theseconfigurations. To select a default configuration, click the View
Manual Unit 1: Basics 19
menu, point to Default Configurations and select a configuration.The relevant configuration toolbar is displayed depending on theconfiguration you have selected (the examples here show theArchitecture and Engineering toolbars). These contain the mostimportant tools for daily work. You can thus carry out design taskswithout having to switch between modules.
Point Assistant toolbar
The Point Assistant toolbar includes tools to assist you in theprocess of entering points. The tools become active when theprogram expects you to enter a point, e.g., for drawing a line.
Global point
Delta point
Polar coordinates
Division point
Point of intersection
MidpointOffset by radius
Perpendicular
Outline auto-detect on/off
Define point symbol
Point entry option
Brackets
Delta point
Delta point
Offset by line
Note: The Point Assistant toolbar is only displayed when Advancedpoint entry is disabled. Otherwise, the tools of the Point Assistantare available on the shortcut menu or - depending on the toolselected - displayed in the dialog line.
20 User Interface Allplan 2005
Filter Assistant toolbar
The Filter Assistant toolbar includes tools to assist you in theprocess of finding and selecting elements. The tools in the PointAssistant are always active.
Match
Format filter
Element filter
Architecture/Allfa filter
Engineering filter
Various filters
Selection rectangle
Brackets
Dynamic toolbar
The Dynamic toolbar appears when a function offers severalimplementation options. Below is the Dynamic toolbar for the Linetool. After selecting the function, you can choose from the variousdata entry options presented on the Dynamic toolbar.
or
The Dynamic toolbar can be displayed as a separate, free-floatingtoolbar or docked at bottom right in the status bar or dialog line.You can toggle between the three on the View menu- Toolbars -Dynamic Toolbar.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 21
Flyouts
Icons with a small black triangle in the bottom right corner areknown as flyouts. These contain additional, related tools.
To open a flyout, click an icon with a black triangle and press andhold down the mouse button. To select a tool, keep the mouse buttonpressed down and position the cursor over the relevant tool. Thenrelease the mouse button.
Note: When a flyout is closed, the icon for the tool that youactivated last is displayed. This way, you can activate the same toolseveral times in succession without having to open the flyout eachtime.
Tip: When you click the icon,the flyout appears shortlyafter. When you click theblack triangle, the flyoutopens immediately.
22 User Interface Allplan 2005
Shortcut menu
The shortcut menu is displayed at the position where the cursor islocated when you right-click an element or in the workspace.
• When you click an element with the right mouse button, edittools appropriate to the element are displayed. Double clicking anelement with the right mouse button starts the function that wasused to create the element originally. All the parameters of theclicked element are copied.
• When you click in the workspace with the right mouse button,several edit tools and the most important tools are presented Youcan also open the layout editor and switch between modules.
Shortcut menu when clicking in the workspace Shortcut menu when clicking a wall
Manual Unit 1: Basics 23
Dialog line
The dialog line below the workspace is where the program promptsyou to enter values. Alternatives are separated by slashes.
Note: You can perform calculations in the dialog line and you cantransfer the results of measurement operations carried out with
Measure & Compute as well as results directly from the
Calculator. You can also use CTRL+C and CTRL+V to copy/pastetext to/in the dialog line.
When you have enabled the Conventional point entry mode, thePoint Assistant is not available in the dialog line or on the shortcutmenu. Rather, it is displayed as a separate toolbar. Every value youenter has to be confirmed by pressing ENTER.
Status bar
The status bar is the bottom line in the Allplan 2005 applicationwindow. Various types of information on the current drawing file aredisplayed here – e.g., the reference scale and unit of length. You canalso modify these values by clicking them.
Note: When the Dynamic Toolbar in Status Bar option is active (onthe View menu – Toolbars – Dynamic Toolbar), the tools in theDynamic toolbar are displayed on the right in the status bar.
24 Orientation in the Program – The Modules Allplan 2005
Orientation in the Program – The ModulesAllplan 2005 has a modular structure. In other words, it featuresindividual program modules, each of which contains the necessarytools for a specific discipline. The most important tools are always athand on the Basic Tools toolbar, the Configuration toolbars and onthe menus. This way, access to the most frequently used tools isprovided without requiring you to switch to a different module. Themodules themselves are arranged in families: Basic family, BonusTools family, etc.
To switch between the modules, the following three options areavailable:
• Click in the workspace with the right mouse button and select thedesired module in the Switch module field on the Shortcut menu.
Tip: If you have enabled the Switch module when creatingsimilar elements option in the Global Options, Miscellaneoustab, the system also switches to the relevant module when youcreate elements using the Shortcut menu.
• Use Tools- Customize to insert icons from the Switch Modulecategory in a toolbar or to define shortcut keys. Thus, you canquickly switch to modules you need frequently.
• Select a module of your choice in the CAD Navigator. This alsoclearly shows the structure of the individual modules.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 25
Note: You cannot use the CAD Navigator to switch to the PlotLayout module. Instead, use the Layout Editor tool.
26 Working with Projects, Drawing Files and Layers Allplan 2005
Working with Projects, Drawing Files andLayers
A project is an organizational unit. A new project is created for eachconstruction project. Technically, a project is a folder; metaphoricallyspeaking, it is a drawer containing the drawing files. An unnamedprivate project for practice and testing is available to each user.
Filesets are an important organizational unit within projects. A filesetcan consist of up to 128 drawing files. You can assign any drawingfile to a fileset. Up to 1,000 filesets can be created per project. Afileset can be placed in a layout to be printed with a singlecommand.
The actual design and data creation process happens in drawing files.These are the equivalent of the transparencies used in conventionalbuilding design. Drawing files can be used to give projects astructure. In IT terms, a drawing file is a conventional file stored onyour hard disk. You can display and edit up to 60 drawing files atonce - in other words, you can have several files opensimultaneously. A project can contain up to 6000 drawing files.When working without layers, the individual building elements (suchas walls, stairs, labeling, etc.) are drawn on different drawing filesand superimposed like transparencies.
Layers provide an additional means of applying a structure - withindrawing files. They apply to all the drawing files in a project. Designentities and components can automatically be assigned the correctlayer. Layers can be set so that they are not visible to the user.
A layout is the unit you send to the printer or plotter. As opposed todesign using a conventional drafting board, the scope of the layoutdoes not have to be defined in advance. Generally, you leave thelayout (which involves arranging and laying out drawing files and/orfilesets) until you’re finished with the design. Each project cancontain up to 3000 layouts.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 27
Using NDW-format files in Allplan
By default, Allplan documents (= drawing files) are managed, savedand opened within projects. But you can also save Allplandocuments in any folder and open them from there, regardless of theproject currently set. Allplan documents opened in this manner areknown as NDW-format files.
For example, you can use this new function to quickly send adocument to a partner office or to temporarily open a drawing filefrom a different project.
NDW-format files are always opened and displayed in a separatewindow. You can copy and move elements between NDW files anddrawing files (by dragging and dropping them and via the Clipboard).Allplan documents cannot be open as NDW files and as drawingfiles (not in reference mode either) at the same time.
Unlike drawing files that are always given predefined names in theformat of ‘tb00????.ndw’ (????= drawing file number), you canassign any names to NDW-format files.
You can use the NDW Layout Element tool to place NDW-formatfiles in layouts.
Elements in NDW-format files are always selected and designed inthe window you clicked first.
The project resources (e.g. fonts) are based on the setting of theproject that is currently open (either office-specific or project-specific). This means that when you send a NDW-format file to apartner office, the project resources may look different.
Advantages of NDW-format files
• Custom project structure that can be managed in WindowsExplorer
• Exchanging data easily within Allplan
• Sending drawing files by email
28 Working with Projects, Drawing Files and Layers Allplan 2005
Restrictions
• When you have licensed a module in the Precast ConcreteFactories family, the functions for opening and savingNDW-format files are not displayed.
• NDW-format files are not available with the FEA, BarReinforcement and Precast Concrete Factories modules.
• The Import, Insert - XRef, Section Display and AnimationWindow – Selected Elements functions are not available forNDW-format files. When you open a drawing file with a XRef asa NDW file, only the frame and the name of the XRef aredisplayed.
• As long as a NDW-format file is open, the Link with ScannedImage, Insert Bitmap functions and all the functions in the FEAfamily are not available (not for drawing files either!). Before youcan select these functions, you have to close all NDW-formatfiles.
Saving NDW-format files
When the active viewport contains a NDW file, the Save Filefunction always applies to this file. Autosave does not include NDWfiles.
Saving drawing files as NDW-format files
You can use the Save file as function to save the current documentas a NDW-format file.
Note: The names of Allplan 2005 drawing files may containcharacters that are not allowed in filenames (\/:*?"<>|). Thesecharacters are replaced by "_".
Manual Unit 1: Basics 29
Using the MouseThe three mouse buttons are associated with functions that change toreflect the current requirements in Allplan 2005. A distinction ismade between three different states:
• No tool is activated.
• A drafting tool is activated (e.g. the Line tool).
• An edit tool is activated (e.g. for deleting).
Note: The information in the table is based on a 3-button mouse. Ifyou are working with a 2-button mouse, you can simulate the middlemouse button by pressing the CTRL key and the left mouse button atthe same time.
Note: In the Global Options – Settings tab, you can specify how touse the middle mouse button.
If, in the tables below, the mouse button assignment depends on thissetting, a number appears in brackets:
1: stands for the Conventional option: set linear snap to middlemouse button.
2: stands for the Windows-compliant option: use middle mousebutton to control display on screen.
30 Using the Mouse Allplan 2005
Table 1: no tool is activated
Mousebutton
This... Does this...
Click on element Selects the element with handles.
SHIFT+click onelement
Selects an entity group with handles.
CTRL+click onelement
Selects an additional element with handles.
Double-click onelement
Displays the element’s properties.
Left
CTRL+click on anelement
Displays the format properties of an element.
Clicking and draggingin the workspace
Selects elements with handles. Depending on the setting in the FilterAssistant , the program also selects intersected elements.
Double-click in theworkspace
Opens the Open on a Project-Specific Basis: Files and Filesets dialogbox.
CTRL + double-clickin the workspace
Opens the Layer dialog box.
Double-click Sets the display scale so that all the elements in the visible drawing files(active, edit or reference) can be seen.
CTRL + double-click Regenerates the section that is visible on screen.
Middle
Click and drag(2)
Pans.
SHIFT + click anddrag
Pans.
CTRL + click and drag Zooms in.
ALT + click and drag Zooms dynamically (cursor = center). Depending on the direction inwhich the cursor is moved, the system zooms in or out.
Click on an element Displays the shortcut menu for the element clicked. The shortcut menucontains general tools and edit tools that are specific to the element inquestion.
Click in the workspace Displays the general-purpose shortcut menu.
Double-click on anelement
Activates the tool by means of which the element was created and copiesall the settings.
Right
Double-click in theworkspace
Opens the Layer dialog box.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 31
Table 2: a drafting tool is activated (e.g. for drawing a line)
Mousebutton
This... Does this...
Clicking in workspaceor on element
Places and snaps to points in the workspace.Left
CTRL + click Aligns points exactly with existing points (linear snap).
Click in workspace(1)
Aligns points exactly with existing points (linear snap).Middle
Double-click(2)
Sets the display scale so that all the elements in the visible drawingfiles (active, edit or reference) can be seen.
Click and drag(2)
Pans. The arrow on the cursor shows the direction of movement. Thefurther the cursor is positioned from the displacement anchor, thequicker panning takes place.
SHIFT + click and drag Pans.
CTRL + click and drag Zooms in.
ALT + click and drag Zooms dynamically (cursor = center). Depending on the direction inwhich the cursor is moved, the system zooms in or out.
Click in workspace Opens the shortcut menu for the advanced point entry. When theadvanced point entry is disabled, clicking in the workspace opens orcloses the brackets.
Confirms entries when requested in the dialog line: <confirm>.
Right
Clicking on a toolbar Quits a tool (= ESC key).
32 Using the Mouse Allplan 2005
Table 3: an edit tool is activated (e.g. for deleting)
Mousebutton
This... Does this...
Click on element Addresses or selects an element.Left
Clicking anddragging in theworkspace
Selects elements in a rectangular region.
1. Clicking + thenclicking again inworkspace
Selects elements in a rectangular region.
Double-click(2)
Sets the display scale so that all the elements in the visible drawing files(active, edit or reference) can be seen.
Middle
Click and drag(2)
Pans. The arrow on the cursor shows the direction of movement.
SHIFT + click anddrag
Pans.
CTRL + click anddrag
Zooms in.
Click in workspace Opens and closes bracket feature.
Confirms entries when requested in the dialog line: <confirm>.
Right
Clicking on a toolbar Quits a tool (= ESC key).
Middle - left Clicking an elementwith middle andthen left mousebutton
Selects a segment.
Clicking on elementwith middle andthen right mousebutton
Selects elements that have the same pen thickness or linetype (switch inGlobal Options).
Middle -right
Clicking with middleand then rightmouse button in theworkspace
Enables the selection rectangle. Use the left mouse button to enclose thedesired elements in a selection rectangle.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 33
Controlling the Display on ScreenIn Allplan 2005, you can zoom in on any area of the design asexactly as you want to. The icons in the border of the viewport letyou navigate freely on screen. These tools are known as‘transparent’ tools; in other words, you can also use them while adifferent tool (e.g. Line) is active.
When multiple viewports are open, these icons appear in everyviewport.
Icon Name Use
Refresh Sets the display scale so that all the elements in the visible drawing files canbe seen.
Zoom Section Zooms a section of the workspace. When there are several viewports, thesection is displayed in the viewport where you clicked this button. Thesection itself, however, can be defined in any of the viewports.Requirements: you have not selected a perspective view and the same view isdisplayed in both viewports.
Pan Pans the section that is visible on screen by a vector that you specify bysetting two points.
Tip: You can also pan dynamically by pressing and holding down themiddle mouse button or using the cursor keys.
Regen Regenerates the section that is visible on screen.
Reduce View Reduces the section displayed on screen in incremental steps. (The displayscale doubles.)
Enlarge View Enlarges the section displayed on screen in incremental steps. (The displayscale halves.)
Scroll Left(... Right, Up,Down)
Scrolls left, right, upwards or downwards.
StandardViews flyout
You can choose between plan view and any of the standard views.
3D View Opens the 3D View dialog box, where you can set and save views.
34 Controlling the Display on Screen Allplan 2005
Icon Name Use
NavigationMode
In the viewport: sets a perspective view. When dragging, the cursor behavesin the same way as in animation windows (sphere mode, camera mode).In the animation window: when switched off, you can draw in animationwindows as in isometric windows.
Previous View Restores the previous view.
Next View Displays the next view.
Save, LoadView
Saves or restores a custom view. Thus, you can set views you use frequently.
Display Scale Sets the display scale.
Always on Top Places the viewport so that it is always on top (i.e., in front of) the otherones.
Hidden-lineImage on/off
Displays the current contents of the screen as a hidden line image (on/off).The drawing is displayed as a hidden line image the next time you clickRefresh or Regen.
ActivateSection
Displays an architectural section that you have defined with DefineSection. You can define the section’s clipping path by pointing and clicking,or by entering the section identifier.
Copy toClipboard
Copies the current contents of the screen to the Clipboard. You can thenpaste it from the Clipboard into other applications.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 35
Display Sequence
Sequence in which elements are displayed on screen
By default, elements are displayed in the sequence in which theywere created or modified. This way, the element you created ormodified last is always on top. The program provides several settingsfor changing the sequence in which elements are displayed. Forexample, you can prevent fills from hiding all the elements below.
The Sequence in which elements are displayed is saved as a numberbetween -15 and +16. Based on this number the elements aredisplayed on screen: the element to which you have assigned thehighest value is displayed on top of all the other elements. When twoelements have the same number, the element you created last isdisplayed on top of the other one. New elements get a fixed defaultvalue. Allplan 2003 elements with the Always on Top formatproperty are automatically assigned a value of 12. More informationis provided in Values for the Sequence element property.
Note: New elements are always displayed on top. The settings areonly applied to the elements after you click Regen.
In the case of elements consisting of subordinate elements (such assmart symbols, element groups, XRefs), the setting made for thesuperordinate element has priority over the setting made for thesubordinate elements. If, for example, you configure the program todisplay an element group on top of another element group, all theelements of which this element group consists are displayed on topof the elements of the other element group, regardless of the settingsmade for the individual subordinate elements.
36 Display Sequence Allplan 2005
The ‘Sequence‘ element property
The sequence in which elements are displayed on screen depends onseveral factors. The following table shows the sequence in whichelements are displayed on screen. The priority is given in the No.column; the lower the number the higher the priority of therespective setting. For example, elements in reference drawing filesare always placed behind elements in active drawing files or drawingfiles open in edit mode, regardless of other settings.
No. Setting Explanation
1 Drawing file status Elements in active drawing files or drawing files open inedit mode are always placed in front of elements inreference drawing files.
2 Show/Hide, Surface elements inbackground option
When this option is activated, surface elements(hatching, pattern, fill) are placed behind other elements.
3 Sequence element property See Sequence element property
4 Time when elements were created/modified Elements that were created/modified at a later stage areplaced in front of other elements.
Values for the ‘Sequence’ element property
The following table lists the default Sequence values for variouselements created in Allplan 2005. You can modify these values in the
Global Options, Entry tab.
Default values for new elements
Element Default value
Dimension lines/text with fill +16
OLE objects +11
Dimension lines/text without fill +10
Nemetschek (smart) symbols +5
Normal design entities 0
XRefs 0
Manual Unit 1: Basics 37
Hatching, patterns -3
Bitmaps -5
Fills -7
Line elements of architectural components(in the case of multi-tier walls, the priority will increasewith each additional construction layer by a factor of 1)
+7
Surface elements of architectural components(in the case of multi-tier walls, the priority will increasewith each additional construction layer by a factor of 1)
+6
Line elements of architectural rooms -1
Surface elements of architectural rooms -8
Notes:
• When you convert a surface element to another one using
Convert Surface Element, the display priority will notchange.
• Elements in reference drawing files are always behind theelements in active drawing files.
• When you have enabled the die Surface elements in backgroundoption in Show/Hide, fills are always behind other elements,regardless of the priority set.
When converting data from V2003 to V2005
Property in V2003 Priority in V2005
Always on Top property +12
All other elements 0
When converting data from V2005 to V2003
Priority in V2005 Property in V2003
Priority > 5 Always on Top property
Priority ≤ 5 Without Always on Top property
38 Display Sequence Allplan 2005
Modifying the display sequence
Two methods are provided for modifying the sequence in whichelements are displayed:
• Select Modify Format Properties (Basic Tools toolbar orFormat Properties on the shortcut menu of the element selected)and enter a value between -15 and + 16.
• Right-click an element, point to Sequence on the shortcut menuand select the desired function:
Function Effect
Into theforeground
Moves the element to the top. This element isassigned a priority value of +16.
Into thebackground
Moves the element to the bottom. Thiselement is assigned a priority value of -15.
One level to thefront
Moves the element up one level. The priorityvalue of this element is increased by a factorof 1.
One level to theback
Moves the element down one level. Thepriority value of this element is reduced by afactor of 1.
In front ofanother element
Moves the element in front of anotherelement. Compared with the selected element,the priority value of the modified element isincreased by a factor of 1.
Behind anotherelement
Moves the element behind another element.Compared with the selected element, thepriority value of the modified element isreduced by a factor of 1.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 39
Activating and Quitting ToolsIn Allplan 2005 you can activate, execute and quit tools in differentways.
Activating tools
• You can click the relevant icon.
• You can double click the element with the right mouse button.This activates the tool that was used to create the element. All thesettings and parameters of the element you clicked are used.
• You can activate tools via shortcut keys. An overview ofpredefined shortcuts is provided on the Help menu underShortcut Keys Table. In addition, the shortcut key for tools whereone has been defined is shown in the ToolTip.
• You can use the shortcut menu.
• You can activate tools via the menu bar.
Executing tools
Instructions are provided in the dialog line after you have clicked atool. For example:
• Point snap (e.g., Line tool: From point):
• Selecting elements (e.g., Delete tool: Select elements to delete).
When appropriate, a dialog box or Context toolbar is displayed sothat you can make settings for the function.
Quitting tools
• Press ESC on the keyboard.
• Click a toolbar with the right mouse button.
• Activate a different tool.
40 The Wizard Allplan 2005
The WizardThe Wizard is small window which is displayed in the workspace andincludes a pictogram-like key representing all frequently used tools.When you click an element with the right mouse button, a Shortcutmenu opens with related tools is displayed. This way, the Wizardsaves you the effort of looking for icons and tools. All you need todo is click an element with the right mouse button and select a toolon the Shortcut menu.
As opposed to a ‘normal’ Allplan 2005 window, you cannot draw ina Wizard window. But by means of the icons at the bottom viewportborder, you can use various tools for controlling the display onscreen. The Wizard window has the Always on Top property andcannot be maximized or minimized.
Several predefined Wizard files are provided with the program. Inaddition, you can also create your own Wizards.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 41
Correcting ErrorsWhen you make an error in Allplan 2005, you can use Undo(Standard toolbar) to correct the error. The number of undo steps isunlimited. For example, if you inadvertently moved an element, youcan annul the move. You can go back (undo) as many steps as youwant, as far back as the last time the data was saved.
You can undo several steps in one go. Click the arrow beside theUndo icon, keep the mouse button pressed down and drag the cursorover all the steps you want to undo. Then release the mouse button.
Redo redoes operations that you have undone. Redo operations,however, are not possible if you have added new design entities inthe meantime.
Note: You can also activate the Undo tool while another function isactive. The function in question will close and all the entries youmade while it was active are “undone“.
Tip: If you inadvertentlydeleted elements, you canquickly restore them byimmediately double-clickingin the workspace with theright mouse button (theDelete tool must still beactive).
42 Saving Your Work Allplan 2005
Saving Your WorkWhen you exit Allplan 2005, all open drawing files are savedautomatically. You do not need to save your data explicitly (like inother programs) prior to exiting Allplan 2005. Exception: NDW-format files have to be saved manually.
In certain circumstances, Allplan makes backup copies of yourdrawing files and/or layouts. For more information, see Using .bakfiles.
While you work in Allplan 2005, you can save your data manuallyas well as have the program do so automatically after a certainnumber of steps. The data in the current drawing file and in thosethat are open in edit mode is saved. And when you perform certainactions (e.g. switching to the Plot Layout module), the programautomatically saves your work, too.
Note: None of the actions you performed prior to saving can be
undone with the Undo tool after saving.
The following actions cause the data to be saved:
• When you switch to a different drawing file, fileset, layout orproject.
• When you switch to the Plot Layout module.
• When you export data from Allplan 2005 using Export Data.
• When you save manually by clicking Save (on the Standardtoolbar)
• When saving automatically. You can activate this function and
define the number of steps between saves in Global Options,Miscellaneous tab.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 43
Note: The interval here is based on the number of tools youactivate and not the time elapsed. If you spend some timedrawing with the same tool, therefore, data is not savedautomatically unless you quit the tool in between.
44 Defining Pen Thickness, Linetype and Line Color Allplan 2005
Defining Pen Thickness, Linetype and LineColor
Before you draw an element, you can define its line thickness (penthickness) and the linetype on the Format toolbar. When the Colorstands for pen option is active (this is the default), the color is setautomatically with the pen.
If you are working with layers and layer attribute matching is active,the format settings are set automatically in accordance with thecurrent layer.
The Format QuickSelect toolbar includes a dropdown list with thefour most important pen thicknesses, linetypes and line colors. Youcan configure which settings are presented on the toolbar inDefaults, Pens & Pen Assignments, Lines & Line Assignments andColors & Color Assignments.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 45
Modifying Pen Thickness, Linetype and LineColor
Use Modify Format Properties (Edit flyout) to modify the penthickness, linetype and line color of an element. After selecting thetool, you can specify which format properties are to be changed in
the dialog box that appears. With you can match the formatproperties of an existing element.
Note: The format properties of individual elements can also bemodified via the shortcut menu by clicking Format Properties.
46 Using the Clipboard Allplan 2005
Using the ClipboardIn Allplan 2005 you can copy selected elements to the Clipboard andpaste them into any drawing file, NDW-format file or into otherapplications. A number of tools is provided on the Dynamic toolbarto assist you when placing elements.
Note: You cannot use the Clipboard when you define patterns andfonts.
Special features in Allplan 2005
You can use the Clipboard in Allplan 2005 just a you would in anyother Windows application. Note, however, that there are somespecial elements and properties:
• Layers: elements retain their layers. Elements on frozen layers(visible and hidden) are not copied.
• Group number: the entire contents of the Clipboard are placed asone group and assigned a new group number. This way, you canquickly group elements and address them as a single entity (usingthe middle and left mouse button).
• Drawing file size: if the allowable file size is exceeded, theprogram issues an error message.
• Text: if the application from which you have copied text to theClipboard is an OLE server (Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel,for example), the contents of the Clipboard are pasted as an OLEobject into Allplan 2005. To paste the contents of the Clipboardas normal text, use Insert Contents – Unformatted (Unicode)Text. Text of this kind is assigned the text parameters currentlyset.
• FEA and Allfa elements: FEA and Allfa elements cannot becopied to the Clipboard.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 47
Copy
Use this tool to copy selected elements and put them on theClipboard. You can then paste the elements from the Clipboard intothe current drawing file as often as required using Paste and Paste toOriginal Position. The elements can also be pasted into otherapplications. This command is not available when no element isselected.
Cut
Use this tool to cut selected elements and put them on the Clipboard.You can then paste the elements from the Clipboard into the currentdrawing file or NDW-format file as often as required using Paste andPaste to Original Position. The elements can also be pasted intoother applications. This command is not available when no elementis selected.
Paste
You can paste Allplan 2005 elements, text (e.g. from a wordprocessing program ) and bitmaps from the Clipboard into Allplan2005. This tool is only available in plan view. If the Clipboard isempty or contains elements that cannot be pasted into Allplan 2005,this command is not available.
If the application from which you have copied text to the Clipboardis an OLE server (Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel, for example),the contents of the Clipboard are pasted as an OLE object intoAllplan. To paste the contents of the Clipboard as normal text, useInsert Contents.
Note: Using the Clipboard, you can only paste Allplan 2005 elementsinto the same drawing file type from which you copied them. Thecontents of the Clipboard are always pasted into the active drawingfile even if the data was copied from a file open in edit mode.
Pasting elements from the Clipboard into Allplan 2005
A number of tools is provided on the Dynamic toolbar to assist youwhen pasting elements.
48 Using the Clipboard Allplan 2005
When you paste Allplan 2005 elements in a drawing file orNDW-format file, the original data is not lost (i.e. all the attributesand properties are retained). If you paste text into Allplan 2005, thecurrent text settings apply. Bitmaps can be pasted into the currentdrawing file or NDW-format file. The following settings are used:
• Color depth: several colors
• Transparency: off; color: black.
• Width: 100 pixels = 1000mm
The Clipboard supports DIB (or BMP) and WMF-format bitmaps.
Note: If the Clipboard contains several formats supported by Allplan2005, you can choose a format using the Insert Contents tool.
Pasting Allplan 2005 elements into other applications
When you use Ctrl+V to paste Allplan 2005 elements into anotherapplication, they are inserted as Windows Enhanced Metafile. Butwhen the Clipboard contains text elements (e.g. normal text lines,paragraph text, component numbers, labels), these elements arealways pasted into the other applications as “pure” text.
Paste to original position
Use Paste to Original Position to insert Allplan 2005 elements attheir original position. If the clipboard is empty or does not containany Allplan 2005 elements, this command is not available.
Note: If you paste the elements into the same drawing file, they existtwice at the same position.
Insert contents
You can use this tool to specify which element on the Clipboard is tobe pasted into Allplan 2005. This tool is only available when theClipboard contains several formats supported by Allplan 2005(e.g. bitmap and pure text).
Manual Unit 1: Basics 49
Using OLE ObjectsThe OLE concept lets you exchange information between differentapplications. Data from a source document (e.g. Microsoft® Word) isassociated with or embedded in an Allplan 2005 drawing file. Whenyou select the embedded data, the original application opens and youcan edit the data in the source document.
The following object types can be embedded in Allplan 2005(depending on the applications installed):
• Excel files (.xls)
• Word files (.doc)
• RTF files (.rtf)
• PowerPoint files (.ppt)
• Bitmaps (e.g. .bmp, .jpg)
The program to which the link is established must be an OLE serverprogram (such as many Microsoft Office programs). Otherwise, thelinked program cannot provide OLE objects.
Linking and embedding OLE objects
Two approaches are available for inserting OLE objects in Allplan2005. The difference lies in the way in which the objects are saved inAllplan 2005:
Linking objects
A link between the Allplan 2005 drawing file and the associatedobject is established. When the object changes, the link in Allplan2005 can be updated manually. Double-clicking the linked object inAllplan 2005 opens it in its original application and you can edit itas usual. When objects are linked with Allplan, the path to the sourcedocument and thus, to the original application must be retained.When you rename one of these two, you have to establish the linkagain.
50 Using OLE Objects Allplan 2005
Embedding objects
When objects are embedded in Allplan 2005, a copy of the sourcedocument is placed in the Allplan drawing file. After you haveinserted this copy, it is no longer linked to the source document; inother words, the Allplan 2005 drawing file cannot be updated toreflect any changes you make to the source document. Embeddedobjects can be edited either in Allplan 2005 or in their originalapplication; but any changes you make to the object have no effecton the source document.
Linking and embedding bitmaps as OLE objects
When you want to insert bitmaps as OLE objects in Allplan 2005,you should pay attention to the size of the objects to be inserted. It isnot the file size that is decisive but the size of the bitmap in thememory. You can determine this size by clicking Edit Bitmap on theFile menu, selecting the file to be checked and clicking File Details.
The following limiting values apply when you want to insertbitmaps as OLE objects in Allplan 2005:
• 3,800,000 bytes uncompressed at a file size of 20 MB (normal)
• 12,000,000 bytes uncompressed at a file size of 64 MB(maximum)
After having inserted the bitmap, you should save the drawing file.This reduces (compresses) the data in the drawing file. If the fileexceeds the values mentioned above, you can use the Edit Bitmaptool to resize the file and save it (under a different name).
For large bitmap files, you can use the Bitmap tool. Otherwise, thesefiles cannot be inserted in Allplan 2005.
Transparency of OLE objects
The background of OLE objects can only be transparent or nottransparent; the default setting is transparent. Transparentbackground means that the background color set in Allplan 2005 isdisplayed instead of the background color of the OLE object.
Therefore, you should disable the transparent setting when you use ablack background in Allplan 2005 and the OLE object you haveembedded is a Word document containing black text, for example.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 51
Editing OLE objects
Double-clicking an OLE object opens it in its original application andyou can edit it as usual. You can also open and edit objects linkedwith Allplan directly in the original application and then updatethem in Allplan 2005. All you have to do is double-click theseobjects and edit them.
Embedded objects can be edited either in Allplan 2005 or in theiroriginal application; but any changes you make to the object haveno effect on the source document.
You can use Allplan 2005 tools such as Copy, Move etc. to edit OLE
objects. To change the size of OLE objects, use the Resize tool.
52 Using XRefs Allplan 2005
Using XRefsYou can place a drawing file as a XRef in a different drawing file asoften as you need. The drawing file will update automatically toreflect any changes you make to the drawing file you have insertedas a XRef. XRefs can be inserted at any scale and at an angle youspecify. Please note that you cannot use empty drawing files to insertthem as XRefs.
XRefs can be placed in ‘simple’ or ‘advanced’ mode. For moreinformation, see Comparison between simple and advanced XRefs.
A XRef is always placed so that its size matches that of the elementsin the drawing file. If the size changes later, you can use Update AllXRefs on the shortcut menu to update the extents. XRefs can beclipped (but this is only possible when you modify XRefs; youcannot clip XRefs when placing them).
You can enable and disable the display of XRefs and XRef borders
in Show/Hide.
XRefs are always placed on the current layer. But the individualelements of which a XRef consists retain their layers. When youmodify the status of a layer, you need to select the Regen function inorder for the elements within the XRef to update automatically.
Please note that a drawing file which already contains a XRef cannotbe inserted as a XRef again. If a drawing file which is inserted as aXRef no longer exists, the border and the reference are retained, andthe file name of the associated drawing file is displayed in theborder.
Editing XRefs
You can edit XRefs using the following Allplan 2005 tools:
Delete, Copy, Move and Rotate. You can use Modify FormatProperties to change the format properties of the XRef (e.g. thelayer). Other Allplan 2005 tools cannot be applied to XRefs.
The scale and the angle of the XRef can be modified at a later stage.You can also change the clip region later on.
XRefs can only be modified and edited as a single entity; you cannotmodify individual elements of a XRef. Selecting Edit Reference
Manual Unit 1: Basics 53
Drawing File on the shortcut menu of a XRef lets you directly openthe drawing file which has been inserted as a XRef.
When you change the display sequence of XRefs, this modificationalways affects the entire contents of the XRef file.
Restrictions
Please note the following when using simple XRefs in Allplan2005:
• Point Snap: the system only snaps to points on the outline of theXRef; elements within a XRef are not snapped.
• Lists/Schedules: elements in simple XRefs are not evaluated andanalyzed in lists/schedules.
• Animation: elements in simple XRefs are not animated.
• Element Interaction: architectural elements within a XRef andarchitectural elements in the drawing file do not interact.
• Hidden Line Image: simple XRefs are not displayed in hiddenline images.
Note: These restrictions do not affect advanced XRefs. For moreinformation, see Comparison between simple and advanced XRefs.
54 Selecting Elements, Overview Allplan 2005
Selecting Elements, OverviewIn order to edit elements you need to select them. First, select the edittool (e.g., Copy) and then select the elements to which the tool is tobe applied. You can select elements either by clicking them or bydefining a region around the elements you want to select. You canuse the Filter Assistant toolbar to help you select elements.
The following table shows a complete overview of selection options:
To do this Do this
Select an element. Click the element.
Select several elements and/orregions.
Select the Brackets feature in the Filter Assistant, click the elementsand/or specify the regions. Then close the brackets. You can also open/closethese metaphorical brackets by right clicking in the workspace.
Select elements in a region. To specify a selection rectangle:
• Press and hold down the left mouse button to open a selection rectangle.• Enter the two diagonally opposite points by clicking with the middle
mouse button (pay attention to the settings made in Global Options).
To specify a fence: Click Fence and enter the points to define the outlineof the fence.
Select all elements. Some functions (e.g. Export) let you select all elements on the active drawingfile and the files open in edit mode by clicking All on the Dynamic toolbar.
Reselect the elements that wereselected last.
Click Reselect in the Filter Assistant.
Select elements with the samegroup number.
Click on an element with the middle and then left mouse button.
Select elements with the same penthickness or linetype.
Click on an element with the middle and then right mouse button. Thisselects all the elements in the current drawing file that have the same pen orlinetype. You can specify whether selection here is based on the pen or
linetype in Options – Global Options – Settings tab.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 55
Selecting elements by entering a region
You can also select elements by specifying a region rather thanclicking them. In the Filter Assistant, you can specify whetherelements fully bounded by the region or fully bounded andintersected elements are selected.
The following options are provided in the Filter Assistant:
• Selects the elements that are fully bounded by the region.
• Selects the elements that are fully or partially bounded by theregion.
• Selects the elements that are partially bounded by the region.
• The selection depends on the direction in which you enter theregion:
- To the left selects the elements that are fully bounded orintersected by the selection window. With this method theselection rectangle is shown as dashed lines.
- To the right selects the elements that are fully bounded by theselection window.
Note: Select elements in direction-dependent manner is active by
default.
The easiest way to enter the region is to press and hold down the leftmouse button and to enter two points that define diagonally opposite
corners of a selection rectangle. You can also use Fence to enter afreeform region.
56 Selecting Elements, Overview Allplan 2005
Selecting and editing elements using handles
In Allplan 2005 you normally have to activate a tool and then selectthe elements to which the tool is to be applied. By selecting theelements directly, however, you can select elements first and thenedit them.
To do this Do this
Select a single element Click element
Select several elements within a selectionwindow
Click in the workspace, press and hold down the mouse button andopen a selection rectangle.
Select additional element Press and hold down the CTRL key and click the additional element.
Select all elements Press CTRL + A.
Delete elements using handles On the shortcut menu, click Delete or press the DEL key.
Move elements using handles Click the selected elements at a handle and drag. Alternatively,enter a displacement value in the X and Y direction in the dialogline and press ENTER to confirm.
Move or copy elements in an orthogonaldirection using handles
Press the SHIFT key, move or copy selected elements.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 57
Working with the Advanced Point Entry
All the exercises presented in the tutorial are carried out usingthe Advanced point entry. This intuitive and Windows-compliant point entry is set by default when you install theprogram for the first time.
Information on the Conventional point entry, brackets feature,Point Assistant toolbar etc. is provided in the section entitled“Precision Drawing” and in the online Help for Allplan 2005.
You can switch between the Advanced point entry and theConventional point entry mode at any time. All you have to dois enable/disable the Advanced point entry on the Tools menu.You can also use the key combination CTRL+ALT+P.
With Advanced point entry being enabled, the preview alwaysdisplays the actual future position of the element to be entered. Inother words, the position of the element refers to the point snappedby the crosshairs. Elements which can be snapped are displayed inselection color.
Note: The illustrations show the dialog line when floating. Theposition of the dialog line does not affect the Advanced point entryin any way.
58 Working with the Advanced Point Entry Allplan 2005
Dialog
Whenever you click a function which expects you to enter points,the following data entry boxes and icons are displayed in the dialogline:
Except for the Draft, Text and Dimension Lines modules in whichthe third dimension is usually not required, the z direction is alsoavailable:
Preview snaps to points
Of course, you can snap to points and place them with the mouse asusual. But there is an innovative new feature when it comes todesigning elements based on existing points:
when you move the crosshairs near a point (all you have to do ispoint to that point), the system snaps to this point. The point snappedis marked with a red X
Fig.: point snapped; highlighted by a red X
Points snapped are displayed in all views.
The entries you make in the dialog line refer to this point. Use theTAB key or SHIFT+TAB to toggle between the data entry boxes. You
can also do calculations (as with Calculator).
Manual Unit 1: Basics 59
Fig.: calculation: DX = 4π, DY = √4 = 2
Preview shows all points
The entries you make in the dialog line are displayed simultaneouslyin the preview. The red cross immediately goes to the point resultingfrom the entry you make.
Fig.: preview of the point, at an offset of DX=2, DY=3 to the point snapped
When you press the Enter key or click in the workspace, the pointyou have just entered is used as the start point of the new element(line in this example) or as the reference point for modification tools.
Fig.: press Enter or click in the workspace to place the point; the line isattached to the crosshairs
60 Working with the Advanced Point Entry Allplan 2005
But before you place the point, you can also point to another pointusing the crosshairs: the offset you enter in the dialog line refers tothe new point snapped.
Fig.: preview of the point with an offset of DX=2, DY=3 refers to the newpoint snapped
Reference to point snapped or point placed?
When making entries in the dialog line, you can see at once whetheryour entries refer to a point snapped or to the point you placed last:
• In the case of points snapped, the data entry boxes arehighlighted in yellow.
• In the case of points placed, the data entry boxes are highlightedin white.
Value entered is proposed
The icons beside the data entry boxes are buttons:when you click an icon, the value entered is proposed for all furthersteps; but you can change it any time.
Fig.: DY=3 is proposed again for the next point snapped
Manual Unit 1: Basics 61
Point assistant available on shortcut menu
Click with the right mouse button to access the functions in thePoint Assistant. These tools assist you when snapping to and placingpoints.
Fig.: point assistant via shortcut menu
Fig.: the midpoint of an existing line can be determined quickly by openingthe shortcut menu directly on the element
Fig.: division point
Tip: When you point to anelement and then click theright mouse button, theprogram automaticallyapplies the tool selected onthe shortcut menu to theelement clicked and placesthe point.When you opened theshortcut menu by clicking inthe workspace, all you needto do is click an element.
62 Working with the Advanced Point Entry Allplan 2005
Context-dependent point assistant/dialog
The shortcut menu and/or dialog line only include those options thatare appropriate to the tool currently selected:
• The Outline Auto-Detect tool is only presented for selectionwhen the system expects you to enter an area.
• Only when you have enabled Ortho Constraint or CursorSnap, will the system prompt for the DX/DY or length values.
• The Use coordinate option is only available with Globalcoordinates.
• When you have enabled Ortho Constraint, Changedirection is presented on the shortcut menu.
Overview of tools provided on the shortcut menuThis section describes the functions of the Point Assistant which areavailable on the shortcut menu when the Advanced point entry isenabled. The other functions of the Point Assistant are explained onpage 74 and the following pages.
Icon Name Use
Last Point The last point entered is used.
Offset Point The point snapped is fixed; the offset values entered in the x, y or z directionrefer to this point even if the crosshairs snap to other points.
Direction Point The current coordinate is used as the fixed coordinate. You can select the x,y, or z coordinate or a combination thereof on the submenu.
Define PointSymbol
When you employ the Divide Element, Station Element and
Perpendicular through Station tools, you can make point settings here.For example, you can define the symbol used to represent the point (forsingle elements) as well the primary and secondary point number.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 63
When you have enabled the Advanced point entry, functions younormally find on the Point Assistant toolbar are directly available inthe dialog line, saving you unnecessary mouse clicks:
X, Y and Z Coordinate
Delta Point (reference to point snapped/defined)
Polar Coordinates
Global Point
Functions for entering an offset are provided for various elements(e.g. architectural elements and openings):
Offset to Reference Point
Offset to Element
Local or global coordinates
In the dialog line Delta Point (local coordinates) is usually set bydefault: in other words, the values you enter in the data entry boxesrefer to the point snapped or the last point entered.
But you can switch to the global coordinate system at any time by
clicking Global Point: then the values in the data entry boxesrefer to the global point (X=0, Y=0, Z=0).
Points based on polar coordinates
When you click Polar Coordinates in the dialog line, you canenter the angle, length and offset length (from left to right) of theelement in one go.
Click a different icon to disable this setting again.
64 Working with the Advanced Point Entry Allplan 2005
Entering points based on point snap and offset entry
When you have enabled the Advanced point entry, you can enterpoints and elements by pointing to an existing point and enteringthe offset in the dialog line using coordinates relative to existingpoints.In Conventional point entry mode, you use the brackets feature(see page 77).
Do the following:
• Use the crosshairs to point to the starting point.The system snaps to this point and a temporary marker appearson it.
• Enter the relative coordinates for , and in the dialogline (use the TAB key to toggle between the data entry boxes).
• Place the point by pressing ENTER.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 65
Adjusting the options
You can customize the Advanced point entry for your needs: clickPoint Entry Options on the shortcut menu.
Fig.: point entry options
You can make the following settings in the Advanced point entryarea:
• Enter offset to point snapped directlyWhen you have enabled this option, the entries you make in thedialog line refer to the point snapped.When this option is disabled, the following rules apply:
- Entries in data entry boxes highlighted in yellow (relative topoints snapped) are ignored.
- Only when you have already placed a point are the valuesavailable in a data entry box (dX/dY/dZ) used as thedifference from the start point placed to the end point.
66 Working with the Advanced Point Entry Allplan 2005
- If the values are set to 0, a point can be snapped. This pointcan be used directly (by clicking or pressing ENTER), or you
can select Offset point on the shortcut menu.When you have selected Offset point, the offset entries youmake refer to this point.
- When no point is active and you select Offset point, theentries you make in the dialog line refer to the point snapped.
Default: enabled.
• Size of symbols for reference and starting point (1-5)
This is where you define the size of the marker of the referenceand starting point.Default: 3
• Color of symbols
This is where you define the color of the marker of the referenceand starting point.Default: rot
Manual Unit 1: Basics 67
Precision DrawingWith Allplan 2005, you can quickly create precise and exact designswithout even knowing the coordinates of points or the length ofelements, and without complex construction lines. You can matchlength values and coordinates from existing elements. In addition,you can perform calculations in the dialog line, as well as employthe measuring tools and the calculator, and then transfer the resultsyou obtain into the dialog line.
Entering length values and coordinates
General
In Allplan 2005, length values and coordinates are always entered asreal values. In other words, you do not need to recalculate the lengtheach time to take the reference scale into account. For example,when designing a wall that is 8.60 m long, enter 8.6 (assuming thatm is set for the unit of length).
Performing calculations in the dialog line
You can also perform calculations in the dialog line when the systemprompts you to enter a length value.
68 Precision Drawing Allplan 2005
Transferring measured values
Values obtained with Measure can be transferred directly to thedialog line by clicking the value to be transferred in the Measure &Compute dialog box.
Using , you can copy the result to the Clipboard and paste it intoother Windows applications by means of CTRL+V.
Transferring values from the calculator
Values you calculate with Calculator are transferred straight tothe dialog line.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 69
Displaying coordinates
The coordinates of the crosshairs in the x, y and z direction and theabsolute distance to the last point entered are displayed on theCoordinate Tracking toolbar. On the shortcut menu you can specifywhether the delta offset to the last point entered or the absolutecoordinate values are displayed.
Note: Coordinates are not displayed in isometric views.Tip: To determine thecoordinates of a specific pointin an element or to place apoint by entering itscoordinates, use GlobalPoint.To determine the pointcoordinates of an element,click the element with theright mouse button, selectFormat Properties and switchto the Information tab. Thecoordinates of all the pointsof the element you clicked aredisplayed.
70 Precision Drawing Allplan 2005
Point snap
When you place a point with the left mouse button, you can snap topoints on existing elements as you do so. You can snap to thefollowing types of points: endpoints, midpoints, division points andpoints of intersection. You do not need to know the coordinates ofthese points, nor is it necessary to work with construction lines.When CursorTips are activated, a symbol (known as a CursorTip) isdisplayed at the center of the crosshairs. The CursorTip shows the
kind of point that has been detected in the snap radius. Using Point Entry Options, you can set the types of points the system is tosnap and whether the system is to scan active, edit or referencedrawing files for points.
By means of linear snap, you can align points exactly with existingpoints. Here, too, visual aids are provided to facilitate the process.
Note: If you have set a cursor snap angle, then this will have priorityover any point snap settings you have made, as well as any othersettings in the Point Assistant. This means that only points inalignment with one of the set cursor snap angles will be snapped.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 71
Using CursorTips
When CursorTips are activated, CursorTips are displayed at the centerof the crosshairs before you set points. These CursorTips indicate thetype of point detected within the snap radius. CursorTips aredisplayed after you have activated a drawing tool (the Line tool, forexample) and you move the crosshairs across the workspace. You can
use Point Entry Options in the Point Assistant to configurewhich types of point the system is to look for. The followingCursorTips are displayed to indicate the different types of points:
Icon Meaning
Free point: There is no defined point within the snap radius.The circle represents the size of the snap radius.
End point: Snaps to the nearest element endpoint. This optioncannot be deactivated.
Intersection: Snaps to the point of intersection between twoelements within the snap radius.
Midpoint: Snaps to the nearest midpoint of a line or polygoninside the snap radius.
Element: Snaps to the nearest point on an element within thesnap radius.
Gridpoint: Snaps to the nearest gridpoint inside the snapradius.
Note: Define Grid Settings defines the settings for the grid.
The grid is only visible when Grid on/off (on the Specialtoolbar) is active. Gridpoints are snapped even when the grid isnot displayed.
Linear snap using middle mouse button or CTRL + leftmouse button: The nearest point in the detection radius issnapped with the middle mouse button or CTRL + left mousebutton (depending on the setting in Global Options) whenplacing points. This way, you can quickly draw mutuallyperpendicular lines. This option cannot be deactivated.
72 Precision Drawing Allplan 2005
Point snap with the left mouse button
You can snap to points on existing elements. These points includeendpoints, midpoints, division points and points of intersection. Youdo not need to know the coordinates of these points, nor is itnecessary to work with construction lines.
Allplan 2005 scans for points within a defined radius about thecrosshairs. This means that when you point or click in the workspace,the system “snaps“ to points within a specific distance (the snapradius), even if the center of the crosshairs is not positioned directly
over the point. Specify the snap radius in Point Entry Options(Point Assistant on the shortcut menu) in the Snap Points tab.
Depending on the setting made in Point Entry Options, the snapradius can apply to the active drawing file or may also includepassive drawing files (i.e., drawing files open in edit or referencemode).
Crosshairs
Snap radius
The program snaps to thecoordinates of this point, as it is
within the snap radius.
Note: In Global Options you can configure the system to emit anacoustic signal whenever you place an undefined point.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 73
Linear snap
You can use linear snap to place points so that they are in directalignment with existing points. To do this, use the middle mousebutton or CTRL + left mouse button (depending on the setting inGlobal Options). If the system finds a point within the snap radius,the point set is placed in such a manner that it is exactly alignedwith the nearest point found inside the snap radius.
Alignment is based on the selected system angle.
If the Show linear snap option in Point Entry Options isenabled, the program highlights the points that are in perpendicularalignment before a button is pressed and creates temporaryconstruction lines stretching to the point. This provides a bettervisual check when using the linear snap tool.
Note: Pressing the SHIFT key during this process will temporarilyhide the linear snap feature.
Crosshairs
Snap radius
Snapped point
Linear snap mark
Tip: Drafting using linear snapis mainly useful withdrawings consisting of fewdesign entities. It becomesmore difficult to align withthe correct point as thenumber of design entitiesincreases.
74 Precision Drawing Allplan 2005
Point Assistant toolbar
The Point Assistant includes tools to assist you in the process ofentering points. With Advanced point entry being enabled, the toolsprovided in the point assistant are available in the dialog line and onthe shortcut menu. In Conventional point entry mode, thesefunctions are included in a toolbar.
The tools only become active when the program expects you to entera point - after selecting an entity creation tool, for example.
Icon Point Snap Use
Global Point Finds a point based on its coordinates. You can also get the coordinates ofan existing point by clicking it or entering its point number.
Delta Point Finds a point based on its offset in the X direction relative to the last pointentered.
Delta Point Finds a point based on its offset in the Y direction relative to the last pointentered.
Delta Point Finds a point based on its offset in the Z direction relative to the last pointentered.
Polar Coordinates Places a point at a specific distance and a given angle from the last point.
Offset by Line Places a point on an element that is at a specific distance from a (reference)point. The reference point is displayed as a direction symbol and is locatedat either the start or the end of the element, depending on which is nearestto the point you clicked. The distance between the displayed reference pointand the contact point is displayed in the dialog line.
Division Point Divides a line that you enter or an element into an arbitrary number ofsegments. The division points can be addressed by clicking or entering anumber.
Point of Intersection Snaps to the point of intersection between two elements.
Get Midpoint Finds the midpoint of an element (e.g., a line) or a line that you enter.
Offset by Radius Finds a point obtained from the point of intersection of two new circles thatyou enter.
Perpendicular Finds the point on an element that is obtained by dropping a perpendicularline from an arbitrary point onto the element.
Define Point Symbol When you employ the Divide, Station Element or Perpendicularthrough Station tools (in the Site Plan module), you can make additionalpoint settings in the Point Assistant.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 75
Icon Point Snap Use
Outline Auto-Detecton/off
Enables/disables the automatic detection of closed, delimited areas.
Point Entry Options Opens a dialog box in which you can make settings for CursorTips and theAdvanced point entry.
Brackets Enables the bracket feature.
76 Precision Drawing Allplan 2005
Setting a cursor snap angle and using drawing aids
When you draw linear elements (a wall or a line, for example), youcan draw either freely or you can restrict the direction in which youdraw to a specific angle. You can select one of the methods presentedon the Dynamic toolbar after you have placed the first point.
You can restrict movement to either horizontal/vertical (orthoconstraint) or set a cursor snap angle of your choice. The currentsetting for the system angle is taken into account. For example, if thesystem angle is set to 30 °, then this is interpreted as beinghorizontal.
Note: If you have set a cursor snap angle, then this will have priorityover any point snap settings you have made, as well as any othersettings in the Point Assistant. This means that only points inalignment with one of the set cursor snap angles will be snapped.
You can use the following options on the Dynamic toolbar to restrictcursor movement to a specific direction or angle:
Icon Function Use
Normal line The lines can be drawn at any angle. This is the default setting.
Lines at right angles(ortho constraint)
The line can only be drawn at right angles to the current system angle.
Cursor snap The line can only be drawn at specific angles.
45.00 Cursor snap angle Define the cursor snap angle here.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 77
Using the bracket feature
With the bracket feature, you can enter points and elements usingcoordinates relative to existing points. You can also use this featureto select multiple elements.
Using the bracket feature to enter points (not withadvanced point entry)
Note: When you have enabled the Advanced point entry, you can
enter points by pointing to the starting point and entering DeltaPoints in the dialog line.
• Activate the brackets with Brackets on the Point Assistanttoolbar.
• Click a reference point.A temporary marker appears on the point.
• Enter the relative coordinates until you find the drop-in point.
• Press Brackets to close the bracket feature.
Using the bracket feature to select elements
• Activate the brackets with Brackets on the Filter Assistanttoolbar.
• Click elements and/or open selection rectangles or fences.
• Press Brackets to close the bracket feature.
Tip: You can also open/closethese metaphorical bracketsby right clicking in theworkspace.
78 Precision Drawing Allplan 2005
Polyline entry tools
The general polyline input is used to enter polylines and polygonal-bounded areas. It is used by countless Allplan 2005 functions, e.g.,when entering hatching, applying a fill or entering a room.
You can enter the polyline from scratch using the drawing aids onthe Dynamic toolbar or you can use existing outlines or elements.
Basic polyline input rules
• Entering two points and pressing ESC automatically creates arectangle.
• Polylines that have to be closed (e.g., for hatching), closeautomatically when you press ESC or when the last pointcoincides with the first.
• When you click an element, you can either define a point on theelement or choose to use the entire element.When you click Options on the Dynamic toolbar, you can makeadditional settings.
• You can create areas composed of any number of areas byclicking Multi on the Dynamic toolbar and then using Plus andMinus to define whether the area is to be added or subtractedfrom the overall area.
• You can use Outline Auto-Detect to quickly select closedoutlines.
Tip: The easiest alternative isto enter a rectangle bysetting two diagonallyopposite points and thenpressing ESC.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 79
Applying Hatching, Patterns or FillsYou can apply hatching, patterns or fills to areas in order to definedifferent materials or to visually highlight areas. In addition, you canapply bitmaps to areas or use architectural surface styles for 2D areas(we will use the term ‘surface element’ to refer to the wide range ofoptions provided by Allplan).
The library of hatching styles that ships with Allplan 2005 includes awide range of hatching styles and patterns. However, you can alsodefine your own hatching styles and patterns (click Defaults on theTools menu) or modify those that come with the program. You candisplay the boundary of hatching, patterns and fills as a construction
line by setting the appropriate option in Show/Hide.
Areas where surface elements (e.g. hatching, patterns or fills) are tobe applied are best entered using a standard polyline.
The following tools are available for entering filled areas:
Icon Function Use
Hatching You can use this tool to apply hatching to an area.
Pattern You can use this tool to apply a pattern to an area.
Fill You can use this tool to apply a color fill to an area.
Bitmap Area You can use this tool to place bitmaps on surfaces.
Area Style You can use this tool to apply architectural surface styles to 2D areas.
80 Applying Hatching, Patterns or Fills Allplan 2005
The following tools are available for modifying filled areas:
Icon Function Use
Reshape SurfaceElement, ArchitecturalArea
You can use this tool to add areas to hatching, patterns, fills, bitmaps orarchitectural elements (slabs, rooms, net stories, floors, ceilings, roofcovering) or remove such areas.
Split Surface Elements,Archit. Elements
You can use this tool to split hatching, patterns, fills, bitmaps andarchitectural elements (walls, columns, slabs, beams, upstands, rooms, netstories, floors, ceilings) into two parts. This can be useful if you need to splitup the 3D plan for creating the plan or plot.
Merge Surface Elements,Archit. Elements
You can use this tool to merge two areas of hatching, patterns, fills, bitmapsand architectural elements (walls, slabs, beams, upstands, rooms, net stories,floors and ceilings) to form a single element.
Convert SurfaceElement
You can use this tool to convert surface elements (hatching, patterns, fills orbitmaps) to surface elements of the same or different type. You can also usethe tool simply to modify the properties of a surface element.
Stretch Entities You can use this tool to modify the outline of filled areas.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 81
Hatching and Reference ScaleWhenever you apply hatching, you can specify whether the spacingbetween the hatching lines is to remain constant or changedynamically with the reference scale. This means that you candistinguish between hatching used to display real objects, andsymbolic hatching, e.g., concrete hatching. Tiles should appear largeror smaller depending on the selected reference scale. Symbolichatching, on the other hand, should have the same spacing betweenlines regardless of scale.
You can make this setting in two places
• In the hatching properties when you create an area withhatching: Here, you can specify whether the hatching is to adaptto the scale or remain constant, regardless of the scale.
• In hatching defaults: Here, you can set the spacing betweenhatching lines (for the Scale-based adjustment in plan setting)and the scale to which the line spacing is to apply. This settingalso defines how component hatching behaves.
Note: When you change the defaults, all the areas where thishatching style has been applied also change.
82 Hatching and Reference Scale Allplan 2005
Same as in plan’ hatching setting
When you have enabled the Same as in plan option, the spacingbetween the hatching lines in layouts always remains constant,regardless of the scale. Components like walls are based on thissetting when a value of 1 is set for the Reference scale for adjustingline spacing so that it is true to scale setting in the hatchingdefaults.
But the display of hatching styles in layouts differs from that indrawing files. The display in layouts is of relevance.
Display in layouts
The spacing between the hatching lines is the same at 1:50 as well asat 1:100 but the number of lines doubles. The spacing is based on thevalue entered for the line spacing in the hatching defaults (regardlessof the scale).
Display in drawing files
As the number of hatching lines doubles, the display in drawing fileschanges associatively with the reference scale.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 83
‘Scale-based adjustment in plan’ hatching setting
When you have enabled the Scale-based adjustment in plan setting,the spacing between the hatching lines changes associatively withthe scale. Components like walls are based on this setting when avalue > 1 is set for the Reference scale for adjusting line spacing sothat it is true to scale setting in the hatching defaults.
But the display of hatching styles in layouts differs from that indrawing files. The display in layouts is of relevance.
Display in layouts
The spacing between the hatching lines is at 1:50 twice as large as at1:100 but the number of lines remains constant. The spacing is basedon the value entered for the line spacing in the hatching defaults andon the reference scale.
Example: You are using hatching 1 with the following settings: theline spacing is 3 mm and the ‘Reference scale for adjusting linespacing so that it is true to scale’ is set to 1:100. This hatching iscreated in the drawing file with the Scale-based adjustment in plansetting being enabled and placed in the layout at a scale of 1:50. Thespacing between the hatching lines in the layout is calculatedaccording to the following formula: Line spacing (from defaults):reference scale x scale of layout; i.e. in this example: 3mm : 1/100 x1/50 = 6mm. At a layout scale of 1:100, the line spacing is 3mm.
84 Pattern and Reference Scale Allplan 2005
Display in drawing files
As the number of hatching lines remains constant, the display in thedrawing file does not change when you switch to a differentreference scale.
Pattern and Reference ScaleThe size of a pattern or pattern element and its display at differentreference scales depends on three factors:
• the height and width of an pattern element. These values are setin the pattern defaults (on the Tools menu – Defaults – Pattern).
• the Scale-based adjustment in plan and Constant as in layoutoptions. You can make these settings in the pattern parameters(Pattern tool- Properties).
• the values for the height and width factor of the pattern. You canalso enter these values in the pattern parameters.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 85
‘Constant as in layout’ pattern setting
When the Constant as in layout setting is enabled, the size of thepattern elements in layouts always remains constant, regardless ofthe scale used to place the layout elements.
But the display of patterns in layouts differs from that in drawingfiles. The display in layouts is of relevance.
Display in layouts
The size of the pattern elements is the same at 1:50 as well as at1:100 but the number of pattern elements doubles. The size is basedon the value entered in the pattern defaults and on the width/heightfactor, which is defined in the pattern parameters.
Example: You are using pattern 301 and the height of one patternelement in the layout should be 10 mm. In the pattern defaults, aheight of 100 mm is defined for pattern 301. You therefore need toenter a factor of 0.10 in the pattern parameters (pattern height xfactor = height of one pattern element in the layout). This yields aheight of 10 mm (100 mm x 10), regardless of the scale set.
Display in drawing files
As the number of the pattern elements doubles, the display ofpatterns in drawing files changes associatively with the referencescale.
86 Pattern and Reference Scale Allplan 2005
‘Scale-based adjustment in plan’ pattern setting
When the Scale-based adjustment in plan option is enabled, the sizeof the pattern elements in the layout changes associatively with thescale. Components like walls are based on this setting.
But the display of patterns in layouts differs from that in drawingfiles. The display in layouts is of relevance.
Display in layouts
The size of the pattern elements is at 1:50 twice as large as at 1:100but the number of pattern elements remains constant. The size of asingle pattern element depends on the following settings: the valueset in the pattern defaults, the height/width factor specified in thepattern parameters and the scale at which the layout element wasplaced.
Example: You are using pattern 301 and the height of one patternelement in the layout should be 10 mm. In the pattern defaults, aheight of 100 mm is defined for pattern 301. You therefore need toenter a factor of 10 in the pattern parameters (height of a patternelement in the layout = pattern height defined in the defaults xfactor x layout scale). At a scale of 1:100, the height is 10mm(100mm x 10 x 1/100); at a scale of 1:50, the height is 20mm.
Display in drawing files
As the number of the pattern elements remains constant, the displayof patterns in drawing files does not change when you switch to adifferent reference scale.
Manual Unit 1: Basics 87
Working Efficiently Using Libraries, Favoritesand Defaults
Default settings
You can save frequently used settings or values in dialog boxes asfavorites and retrieve these whenever they are needed. For example,you can save different wall thickness in the Wall dialog box.
Click to add a new wall thickness value.
Click to remove a wall thickness value.
Enter a value and click to look for the wall thickness specified.
88 Working Efficiently Using Libraries, Favorites and Defaults Allplan 2005
Saving components as favorites
You can define frequently used components as favorites (standardcomponents) and store these in a component-specific library. This isespecially useful if you are working in a team. The use of standardcomponents not only means that they are readily available, but alsoreduces the risk of errors.
You can save walls, doors and windows as favorites. You can evensave dimension lines as favorite files. All you need to do is click
at bottom left in the component’s property dialog. The examplebelow shows the property dialog for a slab opening.
Note: The layer currently set is also saved. When you retrievefavorite files later, this layer is automatically set as the current layer.
Use to save entire components as favorites. Favorite files aregiven element-specific or component-specific filename extensions.
Click to retrieve favorite files (standard components).
Manual Unit 1: Basics 89
Using symbols
A symbol is essentially a file consisting of any number of designentities. Symbols can be used repeatedly within a drawing. The sizeof a symbol is practically unlimited. You can even save an entiredrawing file as a symbol.
The following tools on the Standard toolbar can be used to save andretrieve symbols:
Get from Library
Write to Library
Allplan 2005 ships with a set of basic symbols. However, you canalso create your own symbols or purchase various symbol catalogsfrom Nemetschek.
Symbols provide the following advantages:
• You can create a library of symbols that contains frequently usedcomponents. Instead of drawing the component from scratch eachtime, just retrieve the symbol from the symbol file.
• Symbols are placed as an entity group. This means that they canbe addressed (click with the middle and left mouse buttons) andmodified as a single entity. You can also modify each individualelement separately.
• You can also access the extensive symbol catalogs offered byNemetschek. A lot of the symbols offered here will display withdifferent levels of detail, depending on the scale that is set.
Symbols automatically adapt to the reference scale. If your symbolsinclude text, then this, too, can be made to change with the referencescale.
90 Working Efficiently Using Libraries, Favorites and Defaults Allplan 2005
Using smart symbols
A smart symbol is an intelligent symbol whose appearance changesdynamically with the reference scale and view. A smart symbol iscomposed of several display foils. One foil might contain a 2Drepresentation of an element, while another might include the sameelement in 3D. Yet another foil can contain a simple representationof the element at 1:100, while another could show a complexrepresentation of the element at 1:10.
A smart symbol can have a very simple or very complex structure.
Display at a
scale of 1:200
Display at a
scale of 1:100
Displayed in isometric
view
Manual Unit 1: Basics 91
Properties of smart symbols
• Smart symbols take up less space. Once you have placed a smartsymbol, all the other instances of the smart symbol simplyreference the first instance. This means that, regardless of howmany times you actually place a smart symbol, only the diskspace for a single instance is required (as opposed to symbols).
• When you use Modify Display Parameters to modify aninstance of a smart symbol, this modification automaticallyapplies to all the instances of the smart symbol in the samedrawing file.
• After you have placed a smart symbol, it no longer references thesmart symbol stored in the catalog. This means that overwriting asmart symbol in the catalog with another smart symbol will notaffect the instances of the original that have already been placed.If you have the Smart Symbols module, you can also use
Update Placed Smart Symbols Based on Catalog to updateplaced instances of the smart symbol.
• Checking for design alternatives is drastically simplified. Withsmart symbols, you can replace all instances of a smart symbol orjust a single instance.
• In conjunction with the Object Manager module, smart symbolscan be assigned attributes (e.g. item number, price) for subsequentanalyses in lists and schedules.
92 Working Efficiently Using Libraries, Favorites and Defaults Allplan 2005
Components of a smart symbol
A smart symbol consists of two- and three-dimensional designentities. Allplan 2005 uses the definition and assignment of theindividual foils to reassemble the smart symbol for different scalesand display modes. The exact position of the foils is preserved, evenwhen you resize a smart symbol. This is made possible by setting areference point and so-called resizing points.
When you design a smart symbol, you can define areas of the designentity as being dynamic (resizable) or static. A good example is awindow frame whose sections remain constant - as opposed to theglass surface whose height and width needs to be variable.
3D view
2D view at a scale of 1:1 to 1:99.This display consists of two foils, as the profiles areto remain constant while the glass surface is to beresized.
2D view at a scale of 1:100 to1:500
Manual Unit 1: Basics 93
General approach for defining smart symbols
Follow the steps below to define a smart symbol
1 Draw all the elements that are to make up the smart symbol. Ifthe smart symbol is to consist of several congruent foils fordifferent reference scales and/or views, place the elements thatbelong together beside or below each other in the workspace; thiswill facilitate the process of selecting foils and setting referencepoints.
2 Activate the Smart Symbol tool (Create menu � Bonus Tools� Smart Symbols), select the catalog where the smart symbol isto be stored, enter a name for it and assign parameters.
3 Select the elements to be placed on the first smart symbol foil.
Foil 1
4 Define the other foils.Every area that is subject to a separate resizing definition gets itsown foil.
Foil 2 Foil 3
5 Define the smart symbol’s MinMax box.
Use Get from Library (Standard toolbar) to insert the smartsymbol in the workspace.
94 Working Efficiently Using Libraries, Favorites and Defaults Allplan 2005
Paths in Allplan 2005
When saving or retrieving standard components, symbols and smartsymbols, the system will prompt you to specify a path for the files inquestion. The example below shows the dialog that is displayed whensaving a symbol.
The distinction between the Office, Private and External paths isparticularly important in a network environment. However, you canalso structure your data if you are using a standalone version.
Path Meaning
Office The files in this folder are available to all users in thenetwork. By using an office standard, you ensure that theplans in your office have a uniform appearance. The officestandard can only be modified by the system administrator.
Private The files in this folder are only available to one specificuser.
Project The files in this folder are only available in one specificproject.
External databuffer
The files in this path are for backing up or exchanging data.
Your own path When saving or retrieving symbols or smart symbols, youcan define your own paths and save them under a name ofyour choice by clicking Add Folder....
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 95
Unit 2: First StepsThis unit has two exercises that focus on the followingmodules:
Draft
Text
Dimension Lines
� You will draw a title block that you save as a file thatyou can use again later.
� You will draw a precast balcony unit includingdimensioning information and hatching.
A short troubleshooting section is provided at the end tomake sure you succeed.
96 Overview of Exercises Allplan 2005
Overview of Exercises
Exercise 1: title block
Precast Balcony Unit, Type 12
Exercise 2: precast balcony unit
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 97
Initial Settings for Exercises 1 and 2The first two exercises are designed to provide you with a detailedunderstanding of the drafting tools in Allplan 2005. The optionsavailable for managing projects and drawing files are described onlybriefly; these topics are covered in detail in later chapters. Aminimum of management is nevertheless required. Detailedinformation on project organization is provided in unit 3.
Start by making the following toolbar settings:
Dynamic toolbar
By default, the Dynamic toolbar floats freely in the workspace sothat it is always visible. If it is located at bottom right in the statusbar or dialog line, float it.
To float the Dynamic toolbar
1 On the View menu, point to Toolbars and select DynamicToolbar.
2 Click Float Dynamic Toolbar if this setting has not already beenactivated.
Engineering configuration
This workbook uses the Engineering Configuration.Not only are all the tools you need immediately at hand, but this alsoensures that the maximum amount of space possible is available toyou on screen.
To set the engineering configuration
• On the View menu, click Default Configurations and selectEngineering Configuration.
98 Initial Settings for Exercises 1 and 2 Allplan 2005
In the CAD Navigator in the Basic family, select the Draftmodule.
The Basic Tools toolbar on the left side of the screen should nowlook like this:
Draft flyout
Text flyout
Dim. Lines flyout
Plan flyout
Edit flyout
Basi
c to
ols
(alw
ays
avai
labl
e)
CAD Navigator
Create flyout
Create II flyout
Modify flyout Tool
s in
the
mod
ule
curr
ently
sele
cted
( her
e: D
raft
)
The Engineering toolbar consists of the following flyouts:
Model flyout
Enter Bending Shape and Placement flyout
Area Reinforcement flyout
Area Reinforcement (Mesh) flyout
BAMTEC flyout
Display flyout
Modify flyout
Lists/Schedules flyout
Tip: The step-by-stepinstructions make extensivereference to flyouts and theicons they contain.If you are a novice, westrongly recommend that youmake a copy of this and stickit on your screen!
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 99
This workbook uses the Advanced point entry.It is usually enabled by default.
To enable the Advanced point entry
• Open the Tools menu and check that the Advanced point entry isactive.If it isn’t, enable it.
A message appears announcing that the Advanced point entry isenabled. Click OK.
100 Initial Settings for Exercises 1 and 2 Allplan 2005
In Allplan 2005, you work with drawing files. Drawing files areorganized by project.
If you have not yet created any projects on your computer, the"unnamed project" – also referred to as the 'private' project – isautomatically the active project.This is the project we will use for the initial exercises.
To select a project
1 On the File menu, click Open Project… .
2 Click the < > project and press OK to confirm the dialog box.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 101
Understanding drawing files
In Allplan 2005, the actual design and data creation process happensin drawing files. These are the equivalent of the transparencies usedin conventional building design. Drawing files can be used to giveprojects a structure. In IT terms, a drawing file is a conventional filestored on your hard disk. You can display and edit up to 60 drawingfiles at once - in other words, you can have several files opensimultaneously. A project can contain up to 6000 drawing files.When working without layers, the individual building elements (suchas walls, stairs, labeling, etc.) are drawn on different drawing filesand superimposed like transparencies.
Drawing file 1
Drawing file 2
Drawing file 3
Drawing file 15
Drawing file 150
Drawing file 6000
In order to edit the drawing files, they have to be activated (opened).This is done in the Open on a project-specific basis: files andfilesets dialog box.
102 Initial Settings for Exercises 1 and 2 Allplan 2005
Drawing file status
With the drawing file status, you define the drawing file on whichyou draw and which drawing files are visible and/or can be modified.
The following illustration shows the different drawing file statuses.An explanation is provided in the table below.
Number Drawing file status Remark
1 Active drawing file The active drawing file is the one on which you draw. There mustalways be one active drawing file.
2 Drawing file open in editmode
Elements in edit mode drawing files are visible and can bemodified. You can open up to 60 drawing files in edit and/orreference mode.
3 Drawing file open inreference mode
Elements in drawing files that are open in reference mode are
visible, but cannot be modified. In the Global Options, youcan configure the program to display all the elements inreference drawing files using a single color. Empty drawing filescannot be opened in reference mode.
4 Inactive Elements on inactive drawing files are not visible.
5 Empty drawing file Empty drawing files have no data type icon.
6 Drawing file assignedtemporarily
The drawing file is assigned temporarily to the fileset; thisassignment is deleted when you switch to a different fileset.
To change the (edit) status of a drawing file, click in the relevantbox.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 103
Information on the active drawing file
To get information on the active drawing file, click in the workspacewith the right mouse button and on the shortcut menu, chooseDrawing File Properties. An information box with all the importantinformation about the drawing file opens.
Information Meaning
Memory allocation This shows how much of the memory reserved for adrawing file has already been allocated (as apercentage). Background information: a certainamount of memory is reserved for drawing files.
Drawing file number The number of the current drawing file is displayedhere. The number is also displayed in the title bar ofthe Allplan application window.
Drawing file type The drawing file type is displayed here. Thiscorresponds to the data type icon that is displayedin the status bar.
Max. size of drawingfile
The maximum amount of memory available for thedrawing file is displayed in Kbytes.
Minimum/maximumvalues in drawing file
The minimum and maximum coordinates in thedrawing file are displayed here.
104 Initial Settings for Exercises 1 and 2 Allplan 2005
For the exercises in this unit, you will be using empty drawing files.First, though, you need to name them. We will now open a drawingfile.
To name and select drawing files
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar)
2 Click drawing file number 1 with the right mouse button and onthe shortcut menu, choose Rename.
You can now enter a name for the drawing file.
3 Enter Title block and press ENTER to confirm.
4 Enter Precast balcony unit in the next empty drawing file.
5 Double-click 1 Title block to activate this drawing file and toclose all the others.
Tip: To change the status of aselection box, just click itagain.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 105
Exercise 1: Title BlockIn this exercise, you will create a title block and label it.
Precast Balcony Unit, Type 12
To do this, we will use the Draft and Text modules in theBasic family.
Note: There are also other ways of creating and labeling title blocks.The Plot Layout module contains the Label tool where youcan select from a number of title blocks. These are title blocks thatwere created as label styles and that convey information on date,project name and more. An example showing how to create a titleblock as a label style is provided in "Unit 7: Layout Output".
106 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
Designing the title block
In the first part of the exercise that follows you will draw the layoutof the title block with tools in the Draft module.
Use the Draft flyout on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Tools: Objective:
Reference Scale
Rectangle
Parallel Lines
Auto-Delete Segment
Delete
Modify FormatProperties
Each module has its own set of default settings which you candefine using the Options tool. These contain defaults thataffect the manner in which the individual tools function.This way, you can configure the program to suit your ownpreferences.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 107
Start by selecting the unit of measurement for the values you enter.We will use mm for this exercise.
To set units
1 Click Options (Standard toolbar) and click Global Options inthe dialog box.
2 Select the Entry tab and click mm in the Unit of length list box.
3 Click OK to confirm the settings.
Tip: Alternatively, set the unitof measurement in the statusbar: click in the field besideLength and select 'mm' forthis exercise.
108 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
Before you start working, you should also set the reference scale.You can set any scale you want.The title block will be drawn at a scale of 1:1.
To set the reference scale
1 On the View menu, click Reference Scale.
2 Click 1.00 in the Scale dialog box.
User-defined dialog boxes
In the user-defined dialog boxes in Allplan 2005 you can enterany value in addition to those presented.
This option is preset: enter a value at the keyboard andpress ENTER. The value is set without being added to thelist.
Clicking this symbol and entering a value at the keyboard(press ENTER to confirm) adds the value to the list.
Selecting a value and clicking this symbol deletes thevalue.You can only delete values you defined yourself.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 109
Start by drawing the outer border of the title block.
To draw the outer border as a rectangle
1 Click Rectangle (Draft flyout).
2 Place the first point in the workspace.
3 Place a diagonally opposite pointEnter 170 for the length. Press the TAB key and enter 155for the width.Press ENTER to confirm.
The rectangle is drawn.
4 In the border of the viewport, click Refresh.
Create the interior lines as lines parallel to the border.
To draw the interior parallel lines
1 Click Parallel Lines (Draft flyout).
3
2
2 Click elementClick the bottom line in the border.
Tip: Did you make anincorrect entry? Click Undo. You can undo all stepsback to the last save.
110 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
3 Point through which element is to pass / Enter offsetEnter 20 for the offset andpress ENTER to confirm.
4 Which side?Click inside the rectangle.
5 Number: 1.
6 Point through which element is to pass / Enter offset: 10;Number: 4.
7 Point through which element is to pass / Enter offset: 25;Number: 1.
8 Point through which element is to pass / Enter offset: 30;Number: 1.
9 Point through which element is to pass / Enter offset: 10;Number: 3.
10 Press ESC to quit the tool.
11 To draw the parallel vertical lines, click Parallel Lines again.
12 Click the left-hand side and create two parallel lines - one at anoffset of 15 and the other at an offset of 120.
12
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 111
Finally, delete the lines you do not need.
To delete lines and segments of lines
1 Click Auto-Delete Segment (Draft) flyout and delete thesuperfluous vertical line segments.
2 Click Delete (Edit flyout) and delete the vertical line on theleft.
3 Click Auto-Delete Segment again and delete the superfluoushorizontal lines.
2
1
1
1
3
3
112 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
The border of the title block needs to stand out.
To modify the pen thickness
1 Click Modify Format Properties (Edit flyout).
2 Select the Pen thickness check box, select pen 3 0.50 and pressOK to confirm.
3 Click the four lines in the border one after the other.
4 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Your drawing should now look like this:
Tip: Further editing tools arealso available on the shortcutmenu (right click).Check that no other tool isactive when you do so.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 113
Entering text for the title block
The following part of the exercise involves entering the text for thetitle block using the tools in the Text module.
Use the Text flyout on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Tools: Objective:
Horizontal Text
Midpoint
X Coordinate (DeltaPoint)
Y Coordinate (DeltaPoint)
Copy
Edit Text
Explode Paragraph
Change Text Settings
Precast Balcony Unit, Type 12
Start by entering a label for the contents of the plan in the titleblock.
To enter centered text
1 Click Horizontal Text (Text flyout).
The start point of the text will be exactly in the middle of thesmall rectangle - in other words, the midpoint of an imaginarydiagonal line.
2 Click in the workspace with the right mouse button, then on theshortcut menu (Point Assistant), choose Midpoint andclick two diagonally opposite points in the box.
114 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
2
2
Precast Balcony Unit, Type 12
3 Enter the text parameters:
• Font: 8 ISONORM DIN 6776.
• Text height: 5.0The text width adapts dynamically according to the aspectratio set (in this example: 1.00).
• Click to center the text starting point
4 Enter the following text: Precast Balcony Unit, Type 12
5 Click OK or press CTRL+ENTER.The Horizontal Text tool remains active.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 115
Enter the name of the construction project in the next field. It is tobe left-aligned and we will enter the text as paragraph text. To enterparagraph text, we need to specify a value for the line spacing.
Paragraph text:When Paragraph Text is active, the lines you enter will forma paragraph. The individual lines of text in a paragraph retaintheir original spacing regardless of the reference scale you set.The lines in a paragraph can also be addressed as a single entityfor easy manipulation.To delete individual lines from a paragraph, use .
Explode Paragraph resolves paragraph text into itsconstituent lines.
Line spacing:The spacing between lines is based on the line spacing valuemultiplied by text height. Whenever you press ENTER to confirma line of text, the program automatically goes to the next line.
Snapping to points and entering offset values in the Advancedpoint entry:To position the text exactly, use the point snap feature and enterthe offset value. This feature is always useful when you want toplace a point relative to an existing point.
To enter paragraph text by specifying an offset andusing the point snap tools
� The Horizontal Text tool should still be active.We will define the text’s starting point using the Point snap andoffset entry feature.
1 Point to the point in the title block as shown below.Do not click the point!
This sets the point that will serve as a reference for measurement.The point appears as a small marker.To indicate that the entries for and refer to the point theprogram has snapped to, the data entry boxes for the
X Coordinate and Y Coordinate are highlighted in yellowin the dialog line.
Tip: You can use
to savecombinations of text settingsas favorites:
use to enter a name inthe list and set thecorresponding parameters.
116 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
1
Precast Balcony Unit, Type 12
New condominiumwith underground parking
2 In the dialog line, enter a value of 45 for dX, press the TABkey, enter a value of -5 for dY and press ENTER to confirm.
3 In the dialog box, change the position of the text's starting pointto top left and the Line Spacing to 1.70 and activate
Paragraph Text if it isn’t active.
4 Enter the following text:New condominium [ENTER]with underground parking
5 Press CTRL+ENTER or click OK to finish entering text.
6 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Enter a line of text on the right in the title block and copy it to thefields below.
To enter and copy text
1 Click Horizontal Text (Text flyout).
2 Set the starting point of the text using the point snap and offsetentry feature:a) point to the top left corner of the box
(see figure below)b) dX = 2, TAB keyc) dY = -2d) Press ENTER to place the point.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 117
2
3 Set the text starting point to top left and change theText Height to 2.5.For the sample text, enter: Date.
4 Press OK to confirm the text you entered.
5 Press ESC to quit the tool.
6 Click the text Date with the right mouse button and on theshortcut menu, choose Copy.
7 From pointClick the top left corner of the box.
8 Enter 4 for the number of copies and press ENTER to confirm.
9 Place point (to point) or enter the number of copiesClick the top left corner of the box below.
118 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
7
9
10 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Modify the text using the Edit Text tool.
Text modification:Text can be edited at any time. This provides a comfortableapproach if you are using boilerplate - all you have to do isupdate the text.
To edit text and add a line
1 Click the text at the top with the right mouse button and on theshortcut menu, choose Edit Text.
The relevant dialog box appears and can be modified.
2 Enter Date at the end of the text, press ENTER to go to the nextline andenter a placeholder for the date in the next line: XX.XX.200X
Note: Check that Paragraph Text is enabled as this is the onlyway you will be able to modify the lines together later.
3 Press OK to confirm the text you entered.
4 Change the entries underneath and use placeholders as shownhere following the instructions in steps 2 and 3.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 119
Change the appearance of the placeholder for the plan number.Assign it different text parameters. We will give it a character heightof 5 mm and a character width of 6 mm. First, we need to 'explode'the paragraph.
Defining text parameters:When you enter text, you can use one of the 20 Allplan fonts oryou can use all the TrueType fonts you have installed.The Text Height and Text Width parameters are absolute values.This means that the text will print out using the values you enterregardless of the selected reference scale.
To change text settings
1 Click the Plan number... text block with the right mouse buttonand select Explode Paragraph on the shortcut menu.
This explodes the paragraph and you can now modify each lineseparately.
2 Press ESC to quit the Explode Paragraph tool.
3 Click the placeholder XXX with the right mouse button and onthe shortcut menu, choose Change Text Settings.
120 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
4 Change the text parameters: Text height: 5 Text width:6
5 Click the placeholder XXX.
6 Complete the label using the information provided below.
Precast Balcony Unit, Type 12
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 121
Saving and retrieving the title block as a symbol in a catalog
Tools:
Write to Library
Get from Library
In the last part of the exercise you will save the title block as asymbol in a symbol catalog. Then, you will learn how to retrieve itand place it in an empty drawing file.
Symbols
Symbols are design entities that you can use whenever you need.Symbols automatically adjust to the scale of the drawing file andcan be addressed as single objects using the middle and leftmouse buttons in combination. You can alter symbols and savethem using another name.
Symbols are often used for drawings and other commoncomponents. In time, you will find that you develop your ownextensive symbol libraries for title blocks, fixtures, equipmentetc. that you can use time and again.
Symbol catalogs
Symbols are managed in symbol catalogs. Each sub-folder cancontain a large number of symbols. Using the ProjectPilot, youcan also copy, delete and rename them.
Sub-folders are assigned to libraries.
Office: This folder contains the office’s standard libraries andsub-folders. The data in this folder is available to the entireoffice:
• Standalone: for all the local projects,
• Network: for all local and remote users and projects. Onlythe system administrator can store and manage symbols.
Project: The catalogs in this path belong to a specific project andare only available in that project.
122 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
Private: The catalogs in this path belong to the user that iscurrently logged on and cannot be accessed by other users in anetwork.
If you are not keen on making your own symbol catalog, youcan use the extensive symbol catalogs available fromNemetschek.
Insert the title block as a symbol in a catalog.
To insert a symbol in a catalog
1 Click Write to Library (Standard toolbar).
2 The title block is to be made available to the entire office. In thePath area, click Office.
3 In the Library area, click Text.
4 Press OK to confirm.
5 Select the element(s) you want to save as a symbolUse the left mouse button to open a selection rectangle aroundthe title block. It is displayed in the selection color.
Tip: You can also change theposition of a symbol’s basepoint when you retrieve it.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 123
6 Set the text symbol's base pointClick the bottom right corner. This is the point at which thesymbol will be attached to the crosshairs when it is retrieved.
7 In the dialog box that appears, choose the option Dumb symbol(not snoop-enabled) and press OK to confirm.
8 Click an empty line under Subfolder and enter a name for thesymbol file: Title block.(If you choose a name that is already assigned, only the name isoverwritten.)
9 Click an empty line under Name and enter a name for thesymbol: Original.(Choosing an assigned name will cause the symbol it contains tobe overwritten.)
10 Press ENTER to finish.
11 Press ESC to quit the tool.
124 Exercise 1: Title Block Allplan 2005
Now retrieve the symbol and place it in an empty drawing file.
In practice, the new drawing file might be a drawing file foranother construction project. All you would need to do then ischange the project-specific information and save the title blockagain as a symbol - this time in the Project folder.Besides the symbols you create and save yourself, you can usethis approach to retrieve symbols in the Nemetschek symbolcatalogs as well as DWG and DXF format symbols.
To retrieve a symbol from a catalog
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),open a new, empty drawing file and close the drawing file withthe title block.
2 On the View menu, click Reference Scale and select 1 (1.000).Alternatively, click the Scale field in the status bar.
3 Click Get from Library (Standard toolbar).
4 In the dialog box which appears, select the Office folder and theText library.
5 Press OK to confirm.
The Get Symbol dialog box is displayed.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 125
6 Select Original in the Title Block subfolder.
7 If you want, you can enable the Automatic adjustment toreference scale option. Then click OK to confirm.
Now you are back in the workspace. The symbol is attached tothe crosshairs at its base point.
8 To place the symbol, click in the workspace.
9 To quit symbol retrieval mode, press ESC.
10 If the title block appears too small, click Refresh in the borderof the viewport.
Tip: Activate the Previewcheck box to get a preview ofthe symbol.
Tip: Using the tools on theDynamic toolbar, you canchange the position of thesymbol’s base point andorientation.You can use the PointAssistant to define the exactdrop-in point in the drawingfile.
126 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit
In this exercise you will create a shell drawing for a precast balconyunit. To do this, you will use the tools in the Draft an Dimension Lines modules.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 127
Designing the precast balcony unit
In the first part of the exercise that follows, you will draw a precastbalcony unit in plan as well as two sections using the tools in the
Draft module.
Use the Draft flyout on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Tools: Objective:
Rectangle
Fillet Two Elements
Parallel Lines
Auto-Delete Segment
Line
X Coordinate (DeltaPoint)
Y Coordinate (DeltaPoint)
Mirror and Copy
Midpoint
Stretch Entities
Fold Line
128 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
Start by making initial settings.
To select a drawing file and to set options
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar) tomake drawing file 2 Precast balcony unit current and to close allothers.
2 Click the Length currently set in the status bar and select m.
3 On the View menu, click Reference Scale and select 25.
We will start by drawing the outline.
Bear the coordinate systemin mind and the direction ofrotation of angles!
- x
+ x
- y
+ y+ α
- α
To get a suitable view, use the tools in the border of the viewport:
Refresh Enlarge View
Zoom Section Reduce View
Pan Regen
To draw the outline in plan
1 Click Rectangle (Draft flyout).
2 Click in the workspace to place the starting point of the rectangle.
When you move the mouse, you will notice that the diagonallyopposite point is displayed attached to the crosshairs (“rubber-band“).
Tip: If you have defined the
scale using the button,this scale is also presented forselection in the status bar.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 129
3 Place a diagonally opposite pointEnter 2.60 for the length. Press the TAB key and enter
1.05 for the width.Press ENTER to confirm.
4 In the border of the viewport, click Refresh.
5 Click Fillet Two Elements (Draft flyout).
6 Click the left and right side of the rectangle and confirm theradius proposed by the system.
The system gives you a choice of four fillet options.Select the semi-circle at the bottom.
6 6
7 Click Refresh again.
8 Press ESC to quit the Fillet Two Elements tool.
9 Delete the bottom line in the rectangle.To do this, click the line with the right mouse button and select
Delete on the shortcut menu.(Alternatively, you can also select on the Edit flyout and thenclick the line).
10 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: Did you make anincorrect entry?Click Undo (Standardtoolbar).
130 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
In the following section you will draw the interior lines of theprecast balcony unit.
To create parallel lines
1 Click Parallel Lines (Draft flyout).
2 Click the semi-circle you have just created.
3 For the offset, enter 0.1.Which side?Click within the polygon copies the circle towards the interior.Press ENTER to confirm the number (1).
4 For the next offset, enter –0.02.Which side?Towards the interior again.Confirm the number (1).
5 Click again to create lines parallel to those on the sides.
6 Click the line of the left and then the endpoints of the semi-circleone after the other (see below).
2
6
6 66 6
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 131
7 Click again to create lines parallel to the line at the top.
8 Click the top line and enter 0.1 for the offset.
8
9
9 Click below the line to specify the side on which the parallel linesare created. Confirm the number (1).
10 For the next offset values, enter 0.02, 0.04 and 0.02 and confirmthe number (1) each time.
11 Press ESC to quit the tool.
132 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
Delete the redundant line segments in the corners and complete yourdesign by drawing new elements.
To delete redundant line segments
1 Click one of the lines you want to delete with the right mousebutton and select Auto-Delete Segment on the shortcut menu.(Alternatively, you can also select in the Draft flyout and thenclick the line).
2 Click all the line segments you want to delete.
Use Zoom Section (in the border of the viewport) to get abetter view.
3 Click Line (Draft flyout).
4 Draw the new elements as shown below.
Your drawing should now look like this:
5 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: If you have inadvertentlydeleted the wrong linesegment, double-click in theworkspace with the rightmouse button (this restoresthe element deleted last) orselect Undo (this undoesactions back to the last savingoperation).
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 133
Create the cages at the top and on the sides.
To draw cages in plan using point snap and based onan offset
1 Click Line (Draft flyout).
2 Point to the top left corner.
This sets the point that will serve as a reference for measurement.The point appears as a small marker.To indicate that the entries for and refer to the point theprogram has snapped to, the data entry boxes for the
X Coordinate and Y Coordinate are highlighted in yellowin the dialog line.
3 Press the TAB key to go to the Y Coordinate data entry field,enter a value of –0.50 for dYand press ENTER to confirm.
This defines the starting point of the line.
4 Enter the following values in the dialog line:dX = -0.08dY = -0.40dX = 0.08
5 Press ESC to quit the tool.
2
134 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
6 Now draw the cage at the top using the same approach. Carefulwith the direction and the sign (positive/negative)!
7 You can create the cage on the right by mirroring the one on theleft. To do this, click Mirror and Copy (Edit flyout).
8 Select the cage on the left by enclosing it in a selection windowwhile pressing and holding down the left mouse button.
9 To define the first point for the mirror axis, click the line at thetop with the right mouse button and select Midpoint on theshortcut menu.
10 Press EINGABE to confirm.This defines the first point of the mirror axis.
9
8
8
11 To create a vertical mirror axis, press the TAB key to go to the Y Coordinate in the dialog line and enter a dY value that is
not equal to 0.This creates the cage on the right and completes the design.
12 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 135
In the next exercise we will draw the outline of the longitudinalsection and place it below the floor plan.
To draw the outline of the longitudinal section
1 Click Line (Draft flyout).
2 On the Format menu, click Select Pen Thickness and select athickness of 0.50 mm.
Note: While drawing, you can change the pen thickness on theFormat toolbar at any time.
3 Place the first point below the plan.Now enter the following values in the dialog line. Pay attentionto the sequence in which you enter the values!
- x
+ x
- y
+ y+ α
- α
Bear the coordinatesystem in mind!
dX = 2.60, dY = 0.33, dX = -0.10, dY = -0.12
dX = -2.40, dY = 0.12, dX = -0.10, dY = -0.33
3
4 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: If you have entered anincorrect value, quit the tool,delete the entry and resumeat the endpoint of the lastline.
136 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
In the next step we will modify the upstands.
To modify the outline of the longitudinal section
1 Right-click the bottom right point of the upstand on the left (seebelow) and select Stretch Entities on the shortcut menu.(Alternatively, you can also select on the Edit flyout and thenclick the point).
2 Place a point (from point) or enter the dx vectorFor the dX value, enter 0.02 in the dialog line,confirm the dY value (0) and press ESC.
3 Now click Fold Line (Edit flyout).
4 Click the right line of the upstand.
5 EndpointPoint to the bottom right point you have just modified. Theprogram snaps to this point. It appears as a small marker.
6 Press the TAB key to go to the Y Coordinate data entry fieldin the dialog line, enter a value of 0.10 for dY and press ENTERto confirm.
4
1 / 6
7 Press ESC to quit the tool.
8 Now modify the upstand on the right.When finished, press ESC to quit the tool.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 137
9 Select a pen thickness of 0.25 on the Format toolbar and drawthe cage on the left using the Line tool (Draft flyout).The start point is at bottom left.dX = -0.08dY = 0.18dX = 0.08
9
12
10 Press ESC to quit the Line tool.
11 Create the cage on the right of the longitudinal section using the Mirror and Copy tool (Edit flyout):
• Press and hold down the left mouse button and enclose thecage in a selection rectangle.
• Click the line at the top with the right mouse button and select Midpoint on the shortcut menu.
• Press the TAB key to go to the Y Coordinate data entryfield in the dialog line and enter any value for dY.
Your design should now look like this:
12 Press ESC to quit the tool.
138 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
Finally, we will draw the entire transverse section in one go andplace it to the left of the floor plan.
To draw the transverse section using the Advancedpoint entry
1 Select a pen thickness of 0.50 mm and click Line (Draftflyout).
2 Place the starting point of the line at top left beside the plan.
3 Enter the following values in the dialog line. Careful with thesequence in which the values are entered!The section itself is displayed on the left so that you can checkyour design as you go along.
2
dX = 0.33 ENTER dY = -2.35 ENTER
dX = -0.33 ENTER dY = 0.10 ENTER
dX = 0.02 TABTASTE dY = 0.02 ENTER
dX = 0.07 ENTER
(press TAB to go to )
dX = 0.04 TAB dY = 2.05 ENTER
dX = 0.02 TAB dY = 0.02 ENTER
(press TAB to go to )
dY = 0.04 ENTER dX = -0.13 ENTER
(press TAB to go to )
dX = -0.02 TAB dY = 0.02 ENTER
(press TAB to go to )
dY = 0.10
Tip: To skip a coordinate:Press the TAB key to go to thenext data entry field.
To enter relative coordinates:Enter values for , and
in the dialog line (use theTAB key to switch betweenthe data entry fields). PressENTER to place the point.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 139
4 Press ESC to quit the tool.
5 Select a pen thickness of 0.25 mm and finish designing the cage(8/18 cm) at the top.
Your drawing should now look like this:
140 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
Dimensioning the precast balcony unit
In this exercise you will dimension the precast balcony unit using thetools in the Dimension Lines module.
Use the Dimension Lines flyout on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Tools: Objective:
Horizontal Dim. Line
Vertical Dim. Line
Auto Dimensioning
Add Dim. Line Point
Modify Dim. Line
To dimension a design, you first need to set the dimension lineparameters. Dimensioning then involves three steps:
• Define the dimension line type (Vertical, Horizontal, Angle orDirect)
• Specify a location for the dimension line
• Click the points to dimension
The dimension lines generated can be modified at any time. Youcan add and delete dimension line points, move the dimensionline and change the dimension line’s settings.
Tip: In the DimensionLine Options you can set atolerance value for tilted(dimension) text, specify thedecimal marker, enterblanking values and muchmore.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 141
Start by setting the dimension line parameters.
The most important parameters are the unit, the position of thedimension text, and the dimension text height and width.The dimension line always references the design dynamically(associative dimensioning; the points you click are the referencepoints). Any changes you make to the design are reflected in thedimension line.
To set dimension line parameters
� In the CAD Navigator select the Dimension Lines module.
1 Click Dimension Line (Dimension Lines flyout).
2 Click Properties.
3 Check the settings in the top (general) part of the dialog box,select an Arrowhead and enter its Size and set the Formatproperties for the individual elements of the dimension line.
This is where you set the dimension line pen, line, color andlayer, regardless of the settings on the Format toolbar.
142 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
4 Check the settings on the Text tab in the bottom part of thedialog box and set the text parameters so that they match thosein the figure below.
5 Select a font and define the dimension text height and width byentering the following values:
- Dim. text height: 2.5
- Aspect: 1.25 (the text width adapts dynamically to the aspectratio set: 2.0 in this example)
6 To define the position of the dimension text, click as required inthe Orientation area.
7 Switch to the Dimension Text tab and set the parameters asshown below.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 143
8 Switch to the Entry Options tab and enable the No extensionlines setting.Set the other parameters as shown here.
9 Click in the bottom left corner and save the parameters as afavorite file called "Tutorial".
10 Click Save to confirm.
11 Press OK to confirm the Dimension Line dialog box.
144 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
We will now dimension the longitudinal section using horizontaldimension lines.
To create horizontal dimension lines
� The Dimension Line tool is still active.
1 Set the view so that there is enough space at the top for thedimension line.
2 On the Context toolbar, click Horizontal.
3 Place a point for the dimension line or click a dim. lineSpecify the position of the dimension line by clicking in theworkspace above the longitudinal section. When the dimensionline is generated, it will pass through this point.
4 Click the six points to be dimensioned.
A preview of the dimension line is displayed immediately. Thispreview will update automatically to include new dimensionedpoints. You can click the points you want to dimension in anysequence.
5 To finish entering points, press ESC.
Horizontal remains active so that you can create the nextdimension line.
6 Place a point for the dimension line or click a dim. linePlace a point below the longitudinal section through which thedimension line is to pass.
7 Click the points to be dimensioned and press ESC.
4 44 4
7 77 7
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 145
In the following exercise, we will dimension the longitudinal sectionusing vertical dimension lines.
To create vertical dimension lines
� The Dimension Line tool is still active.
1 On the Context toolbar, click Vertical.
2 Place a point to the left of the section through which thedimension line is to pass.
3 Click the corners of the cage and the upstand and press ESC toquit the tool.
Vertical remains active so that you can create the nextdimension line.
4 Place a point for the dimension line or click a dim. lineMove the crosshairs to the left of the dimension line as the nextdimension line should be to the left of the first one.
The system snaps to the dimension line, which appears in theselection color. In addition, a symbol indicates the side on whichthe new dimension line is created.
5 Click in the workspace to confirm the side on which the newdimension line is to be created.
6 Click the points to be dimensioned.
7 Create the other, still missing vertical dimension lines in thesection and on the right.
Tip: To define the spacingbetween the individualdimension lines, click
Properties. But you canalso move dimension lineslater using MoveDimension Line.
146 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
4
5
Now we will dimension a part of the floor plan using the AutoDimensioning tool. All you need to do is enter a single line. Theprogram automatically dimensions all the points where this lineintersects the design.
To create dimension lines automatically
1 Click Auto Dimensioning (Create flyout).
2 On the Context toolbar, click Match parameters fromdimension line and click an existing dimension line.
3 Place a point above the plan through which the dimension line isto pass.
4 1. Place a point for the dimension line or click a dim. line:Confirm the value 0.00.
5 1. Place direction point 1 or enter a direction angle or line:Click the first point above the cage to the left of the precast unit.
6 Place the next direction point:Click the equivalent point on the right.
7 Place the next direction point: Press ESC twice to quit the tool. Allthe points where the line intersects the design are dimensioned.
5 6
3
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 147
In the next exercise, you will learn how to add points to existingdimension lines.
Dimension lines will update automatically to reflect changes(stretching entities, lengthening lines etc.) you make to thedesign. But this will only work when all dimension lines are inthe same drawing file or when the file is open in edit mode.
Often, changes in a design will mean that new dimension linepoints need to be added or removed. In these cases, you do notneed to create a new dimension line. You can simply adddimension line points to existing dimension lines or delete pointswhich are no longer required.
To add dimension line points
1 Click the dimension line to which you want to add points withthe right mouse button and click Add Dim. Line Point on theshortcut menu.(Alternatively, you can also select Add Dim. Line Point onthe Dimension Lines flyout and then click the dimension line).
2 Click the points to be dimensioned (left and right exterior edge ofthe cages).
1
2 2
3 Press ESC twice to quit the tool.
Tip: To remove a dimensionline point, click Del Dim.Line Point and then thepoint. You can also use theshortcut menu.
148 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
It is also possible to change the parameter settings of dimension lines(apart from the spacing between dimension lines).
• Click Modify Dim. Line.
- Set the new dimension line parameters in the Propertiesand click the dimension lines to apply the changes.You can also copy the parameters from existing dimensionlines. Click Match parameters from dimension line andclick an existing dimension line to use its settings.
- Alternatively, you can also select a dimension line type forwhich the new parameters are to apply on the Context toolbarand then enclose all the dimension lines in a selectionrectangle.
• You can also modify dimension lines by clicking a dimension linewith the right mouse button and selecting Properties on theshortcut menu.The Section/Point tab is only available in the Dimension Linedialog box when you activate dimension lines using thisapproach. Using this tab, you can modify the parameters ofdimension line sections. Depending on the section you clicked,you can modify arrowheads or alter other parameters., forexample. All the settings you make only apply to the section youclicked.Click , , and to switch between the individualdimension line sections or elevation points.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 149
Create the other dimension lines as shown below:
150 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
Applying hatching to the precast balcony unit and making a quickprintout
The following part of the exercise involves applying hatching to thesections of the precast balcony unit using the tools in the Draftmodule.
Use the Draft flyout on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Tools: Objective:
Hatching
Outline Auto-Detect
Convert Surface Element
Reshape SurfaceElement, ArchitecturalArea
Show/Hide
Print Preview
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 151
Start by selecting a hatching style representing reinforced concreteand apply it to the longitudinal section of the precast balcony unit.
To apply hatching
1 Click Hatching (Draft flyout).
2 On the Hatching Context toolbar, click the button displaying thehatching style.
3 In the Hatching dialog box, select hatching style 7.
4 Specify the other settings as shown above.
5 Click OK to confirm the dialog box.
Tip: When you click thenumber displayed on theHatching Context toolbar, thefollowing dialog box appears.To select a hatching style, justclick it.
152 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
6 Click Outline Auto-Detect (dialog line, icon must be pressedin).
7 Click within the area where hatching is to be applied. Das Systemermittelt automatisch die Begrenzung.
8 Press ESC to finish defining the area.
9 Press ESC to quit the tool.
The next step is to change the hatching style.
To modify the hatching style
1 Click Convert Surface Element (Draft flyout).
2 Set the Convert Surface Element Context toolbar as shown belowand click the button displaying the hatching style.
3 In the Hatching dialog box, select hatching 6 and click OK toconfirm.
Tip: To apply hatching torectangular areas, click twodiagonally opposite pointsand press ESC.
Tip: To modify the hatchingstyle, you can also click thehatching with the rightmouse button and selectProperties on the shortcutmenu. This opens theHatching dialog box (seeprevious exercise).
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 153
4 Select surface elements to convert to hatchingClick the hatching you have applied to the longitudinal section.
5 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Now we will remove the hatching where it overlaps the dimensiontext.
To cut out hatching near the dimension text
1 Click Reshape Surface Element, Architectural Area (Draftflyout).
2 Select element to modify:Click the hatching applied to the longitudinal section.
3 Disable the Outline Auto-Detect tool in the dialog line (iconmust not be pressed in!).
4 Click Minus on the Dynamic toolbar, use the left mouse button tomark out the area around the dimension line and press ESC twice.The hatching is removed from this area.
5 Repeat steps 2 and 4 for the second dimension line.
Tip: You can also apply whitefills to dimension text.
To do this, enable the Applyblanking (fill) to dimensiontext option in the Properties of thedimension line, Text tab.
154 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
Now use the same approach to apply hatching to the transversesection as shown below:
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 155
Finally, we will make a quick printout of the precast unit.Requirement: the drawing file 2 Precast balcony unit is still active.
Quick printoutUsing this tool, you can quickly print out interim results. Often,it is convenient to have the current edit status on paper withouthaving to assemble a layout first. This can be done using the
Print tool. This way, you can quickly print out details orsections of floor plans. Before you start printing, you need tocheck that your output device has been correctly installed andconfigured.
Requirements for printingIf you are working in a network, you can use any deviceconnected to a remote machine (assuming it is configuredcorrectly).Connect the output device and open the Windows Print Manager(2000 or XP) to install it. In a network environment, it makessense to install the device on the computer to which it isconnected. Then share it.For more information, please consult the Windowsdocumentation or Allplan’s online Help system.
The settings (e.g. margins, header, footer, construction lines) youhave made in the Print Preview tool are used for printing. Youcan also set a scale, define the section to be printed out and set upthe printer.
If you want to print out the current contents of the screen withoutmaking print settings beforehand, just click Print on theStandard toolbar. The default printer is used.But if you want to select a different printer, click Print on theFile menu.
156 Exercise 2: Precast Balcony Unit Allplan 2005
To print the current contents of the screen
1 Click Print Preview (Standard toolbar).
2 Click Print Preview Options, select the Display tab andenable the Thick line check box This ensures that all the differentline weights are printed out as such.
If you want elements which are created as construction lines toappear in the printout, enable the Print construction lines checkbox. Specify the other options to suit your own preferences.
3 If necessary, set the scale in the print preview.
4 Click Set Up Printer if you do not want to use the defaultprinter.
Tip: To print more screencontents, click Print onthe Standard toolbar.
This prints using the mostrecent settings.
Manual Unit 2: First Steps 157
5 Select another printer in the Name area of the Printer Setupdialog box and click OK.
6 Click Print.
The printer you have selected in Set Up Printer is used.
7 Press ESC to close the print preview.
Tip: Click Properties to setthe paper size etc. Detailedinformation is provided in theprinter documentation.
158 Troubleshooting Allplan 2005
TroubleshootingSometimes, things will not immediately work out as required. Thischecklist should help you to resolve common problems.
What do I do when …?
• ... I have selected the wrong tool?Press ESC and click the tool you actually wanted.
• ... I make a mistake as I go along?Press ESC to cancel (several times if necessary).Click Undo.
• ... I have inadvertently deleted the wrong elements?If Delete is still active: press the right mouse button twice.If no function is active: Click Undo.
• ... I have unintentionally opened a dialog box or entered wrongvalues?Click Cancel.
What if..
• ..the workspace is empty but you are sure the drawing filecontains design data.
- Click Refresh (in the viewport border).
- Click Plan View.
• ... the result of a design operation is not displayed correctly.Click Refresh in the border of the viewport to refresh thedisplay.
• ... the workspace is suddenly divided into a series of differentviewports.On the Window menu, click 1 Viewport.
• ...specific kinds of elements such as text or hatching do notappear in the workspace.Click Show/Hide (Standard toolbar) and check that theelements in question are selected.
Tip: Check whether therelevant layer is set so that itis visible.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 159
Unit 3: ProjectOrganization
Project structure, i.e. the way in which you organize yourdata, is an essential part of any building design project.An efficient and logical structure will allow you to locatethe data you need without having to perform tedioussearches.
It is worth spending time carefully planning a project’sstructure before even drawing the first line. Consider thetime and effort spent doing this as a good investment -after all, in the long term, it will save you time andmoney.
Allplan 2005’s flexible approach allows users to createtheir own office-specific structures which, in turn, can bealtered to suit the needs of special projects.
This chapter covers the following:
� Managing data with ProjectPilot
� Using layers
� Tips on project organization
Note: If you wish to skip the general chapters andcontinue working though the tutorial, proceed to thesection entitled “Creating a Project” on page 175.
Note: You can also download this training project fromthe Internet. More information is provided on page 188.
160 Using Layers Allplan 2005
What is ProjectPilot?
You use the ProjectPilot to create and structure projects in a simpleand clear manner.
The ProjectPilot is a powerful data management tool developedspecially for the data structure of Allplan 2005. The ProjectPilotprovides tools for copying, moving, renaming and deleting data (e.g.,projects, drawing files, symbols, etc.).
If you are already familiar with Windows Explorer, then you’ll findthat working with ProjectPilot is just as easy. Most steps can beaccomplished via the shortcut menu and you can move or copy filesby dragging and dropping them.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 161
ProjectPilot’s user interface
The folders and documents contained in the
selected node (on the left) are displayed in the area
on the right. You can sort the displayed documents
by clicking on the title of a column. Clicking inthebackground with the right mouse button lets you
display the documents as a list or as icons.
Projects and folders are displayed in a tree
structure in the area on the left. Click the plus
sign (+) to display the levels in the folder.
Click on the name of a folder to display its
contents in the right pane.
You can display the contents of the folder and
open it at the same time by double-clicking.
A preview of the currently selected document is displayed in the preview area.
To move the preview, click it with the left mouse button and drag. To zoom in on
an area in the preview, open a selection rectangle using the middle mouse
button. Double-clicking with the left mouse button or pressing the * key on the number pad
restores the preview to its original size.
To display in an isometric view: use the number keys on the number pad.
Check that the Num Lock key is active as you do so.
162 Using Layers Allplan 2005
Common approaches in ProjectPilot
If you are already familiar with Windows Explorer, you will quicklyfind your way around the ProjectPilot. Most steps can beaccomplished via the shortcut menu or by dragging and dropping.
Sorting the displayed documents
You can sort the displayed documents by clicking on the title of acolumn. The first time you click the column title, the documents aresorted in ascending order. Clicking the same column title again sortsthe documents in descending order. An arrow is displayed to indicatewhich column is being sorted and whether sorting is in ascending ordescending order.
Sorted in ascending order (arrow pointsupwards) and according to drawing name
Sorted in descending order (arrow pointsdownwards) and according to drawingname
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 163
Copying and moving with Drag & Drop
Instead of using the shortcut menu, you can also drag & dropselected documents in order to move or copy them. Select thedocuments, click within the selection with the left mouse button,keep the mouse button pressed down and then drag. You can tellwhether this is possible by the shape of the cursor when the mousepointer is positioned over the destination area.
Cursor Meaning
The document will be copied to the folder that is below the mouse pointer.
The document will be moved to the folder that is below the mouse pointer.
Note: To move documents, hold down the SHIFT key while dragging thedocuments.
A shortcut to the document will be created in the folder below the mousepointer (e.g., when assigning drawing files to a fileset).
The document cannot be placed here.
Working with the shortcut menu
Almost all tools available in the ProjectPilot can be accessed via theShortcut menu. Depending on which element you click, a shortcutmenu appropriate to the element opens.
Shortcut menu of a project Shortcut menu of the filesetfolder
164 Using Layers Allplan 2005
Using the preview
A preview of the selected document is displayed in the preview area.In this view, you can zoom, pan and select isometric views. You canspecify on the View menu - Preview whether and at which positionthe preview is to be placed.
• To disable the preview: on the View menu, point to Preview andclick None.
• To zoom: use the left mouse button to open a selection rectanglearound the area you want to view in detail. The cursor changes tocrosshairs.
• To pan in the preview: move the view with the middle mousebutton. The cursor changes to a hand. Alternatively, use thecursor keys.
• To restore the full view of the image in the preview: double-click in the preview are with the middle mouse button, or pressthe * key on the number pad.
• To display in an isometric view: use the number keys on thenumber pad. Please note that NUMLOCK and the preview windowhave to be enabled.
Note: The preview is displayed with specific documents (drawingfiles, layouts) only.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 165
Generating and printing reports
You can display and print out reports by clicking the category forwhich you wish to generate a report with the right mouse button andthen clicking Report on the shortcut menu.
Icon Use
Goes to the first page in the list.
Scrolls back one page.
Displays the current page and the total number of pages.
Scrolls forward one page.
Goes to the last page in the list.
Prints out the individual page or all the pages in the list ona standard Windows printer.
Opens the Print Setup dialog box, where you can choose adifferent printer and make settings.
Exports the list in different formats.
Enlarges or reduces the display.
A company logo and address is displayed in the header and footer ofa report. The program ships with the logo and address of NemetschekAG but, of course, you can replace this information with your ownlogo and address:
• To replace the logo displayed in the header, enter your companylogo in the rptlogo.bmp file in the nem\allplan\etcfolder. In the report the logo is resized to a size of 120x120pixels. This change has to be made at all workstations.
• To modify the information displayed in the footer, enter Allplan2005, select Tools – Defaults – Office Name and Address andenter the name and address of your company. If you are workingon a network with Workgroup Manager, only the administrator(sysadm) can make these entries or changes.
166 Using Layers Allplan 2005
Using Layers
Understanding layers
Layers provide an additional means of applying a structure - withindrawing files. Metaphorically speaking, a layer is a transparency onwhich design elements belonging to a specific category (load-bearingwalls, non-bearing walls) are drawn. Layers can be set so that theyare visible or hidden.
The use of layers obviates the need for frequent switching betweendrawing files and they ensure that associative elements - such aswall dimensions or sill elevation labels - reside in the same drawingfile and yet can still be hidden from view.
Layers are important organizational elements. Their importanceincreases the more people are involved in a project and the more aCAD system is used for the specialist design processes. Layers do notreplace drawing files. Rather, they complement them.
Defining the layer on which to design
Every element is automatically drawn on a specific layer. The layeron which you draw is based on the tool you use. A line and a wall,for example, are drawn on different layers.
The layer on which you draw is governed by the followingsettings:
• When you activate a tool (e.g., Line) for the first time, a specificlayer is automatically selected as the current layer. The layer inquestion depends on which tool you activate. This is only possiblewhen the Auto-select layer with menu option is activated in theLayer dialog box. If this option is disabled, the Default layer isalways used.
• You can use Select Layers or the Format toolbar to define adifferent layer as the current one. This layer will thenautomatically be used as the current layer the next time youactivate the tool.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 167
• If you save components as favorites, the layer you have currentlyset is also saved. When you retrieve favorite files later, this layeris automatically set as the current layer.
• The sill representation of door and window openings get the layerof the wall in which they are inserted, regardless which layer iscurrently set.
Setting the format properties of layers
Every layer has pen, line and color properties. In the Layer dialogbox, you can specify that an element is to automatically assume theproperties of the layer on which it is drawn.
The format properties of a layer can also be defined as a linestyleand saved under a name of your choice. Elements can then beassigned the format properties from this layer in a fixed manner.
When defining linestyles, you specify whether they change accordingto the scale or drawing type. You can define different linestyles forvarious scale ranges and/or drawing types so that the display ofelements varies depending on the reference scale / drawing type set.Linestyles enable users to work on a scale-independent basis.
Drawing types define how elements are displayed on screen and inthe printout. The display of the elements varies depending on theselected drawing type. Requirements: the format properties are takenfrom the layer (in a fixed manner) and the use of linestyles isenabled.
168 Using Layers Allplan 2005
Layer access rights
There are different layer access rights. These rights control whetheryou can see and/or modify layers (and thus the elements assigned tothe layers). The access rights are presented by icons in the Layerdialog box, Select Layer/Visibility tab:
Icon Access right Explanation
Current The layer on which you draw.
Modifiable Elements in this layer are visible and canbe modified.
Visible, frozen Elements in this layer are visible butcannot be modified.
Hidden, frozen Elements in this layer are not visible andcannot be modified.
The color of the bottom part of the layer icon shows the rights of thecurrent user group (yellow = editing rights, gray = only visible ->cannot be edited).
The color used to display the upper part shows the current visibilitystatus.
In the Select Layer/Visibility tab, you can limit access rights tolayers and, for example, set the status of Modifiable layers toVisible, frozen.
But access rights to layers also depend on the design group to whichthe relevant user belongs. Design groups are required when severalusers are working on different levels within the layer hierarchy. Thisensures that the layers which serve as the basis for a design are notchanged by users unless their design group has the explicit right todo so.
Thus, you cannot assign a higher status (for example, set hiddenlayers to modifiable) to layers which you are not allowed to accessdue to the design group you belong.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 169
Setting layer visibility
You can set layers so that they are visible or invisible and thusshow/hide the corresponding elements.
This way, you can quickly hide the elements you don't need duringthe current design phase, selectively modify elements in thedisplayed layers, check your plan and see whether all the elementsare assigned to the desired layer. For example, you might choose tohide the slab layer and then view the spatial arrangement of thebuilding as a hidden line image in perspective view.
If you find that you often require the same combination of visibleand hidden layers (for dimensioning or labeling at certain scales, forexample), then it is best to define what is known as a layer set. Youcan also use layer sets when assembling your layout later on so thatonly the visible layers are printed out.
Note: In the Layer dialog box, enable the Display in drawing fileoption to use a fixed color to display elements on frozen layers.
Tip: Right click an elementand select Modify LayerStatus on the shortcut menuand then click IsolateElement Layer to hide all thelayers with the exception ofthe element layer.
170 Using Layers Allplan 2005
Managing layers and layer structures
The management of layers and layer structures is generally theresponsibility of the system administrator. This person defines whichlayers are used, sets up the design groups and grants access rights.Employees (architects, engineers, etc.) are assigned to the designgroups, and thus they are granted the relevant access rights to theindividual layers.
Advantages of organizing data using layers
With large projects in particular, organizing data using layers hassignificant advantages.
Task-oriented approach
For individual disciplines or design phases like, for example,designing the office arrangement in an administrative building, thesame reference drawing files and current drawing file are required foreach floor. As you work, you need to switch between the floorsfrequently.
If you work with layers, you do not need to reassemble the necessarydrawing files each time or create filesets with each new project. Justdefine the layer sets you need for certain design phases/disciplinesand store these as an office-specific standard. You can reuse thelayer sets time and again – even in new projects.
Benefits during the analysis phase
In order for the interaction between elements to function cleanly, thewalls and columns in question have to reside in the same drawingfile. This is also the case for certain analysis and evaluationoperations. With layers, you can meet these requirements easily.
Easier to assemble layouts
Layer sets are user-defined compilations of layers. These can also beused when editing and assembling layouts. When assembling alayout, you can choose to display only the elements in a specificlayer set- switching between 1:50 and 1:100 is thus no problem.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 171
Simplified data exchange via interfaces
Exporting drawing files to DXF/DWG layers is easier as you canassign each layer in a drawing file to a different DXF/DWG layer.When importing DXF/DWG files, the DXF/DWG layer structure canbe automatically integrated in the layer hierarchy.
Relationship between layers and drawing files
The use of layers doesn't mean that drawing files don't play a rolewhen it comes to organizing your data. With large project inparticular, a combination of both is essential. With the samestructural depth, the number of drawing files required is far lesswhen working with layers.
The number of drawing files you need not only depends on the sizeof the project, but also on your hardware. Modern, fast computerswith a lot of memory can handle a lot more data per drawing filewithout this leading to a noticeable downturn in performance. To beon the safe side, however, it is advisable to settle for a compromisebetween drawing file size and computing power in order to avoidpushing the hardware to its limits.
The interplay between layers and drawing files depends on thefollowing factors:
• The size of the project and the number of designers involved atany one time.If several designers are working on one floor, create one drawingfile per area of responsibility (e.g., East Wing, Central Unit, WestWing, for example.)
• Simultaneous involvement of specialist designers on the project.Separate drawing files should always be used for the specialistdesigns in order to facilitate concurrent activity.
172 Using Layers Allplan 2005
Layer hierarchy
The management of layers and layer structures is generally theresponsibility of the system administrator. This person defines whichlayers are used, sets up the design groups and grants access rights.Employees (architects, engineers, etc.) are assigned to the designgroups, and thus they are granted the relevant access rights to theindividual layers.
Layers are not arranged linearly but hierarchically in a tree structure.An exception is the default layer which is not integrated in thehierarchic structure. The layer structure consists of the followingthree hierarchic levels:
• The first level describes the layer category (e.g., ARCHITECTURE,ENGINEERING).
• The second level is divided into special fields within the category(e.g., Design, Room).
• The third level consists of the layers themselves. Every layer has afull (long) name with a detailed explanation of the contents. Eachlayer also has an abbreviated name (e.g. Ceiling, RA_CE).
Abbr.3rd Level2
nd Level1
st Level
Layers
Drawing file
RO_GEMRO_RORO_FLRO_CLRO_VSRO_BASEBRO_STORY
GeneralRoomFloorCeilingVertical surfaceBaseboardStory
DesignRoom
ARCHITECTURE
The current layer's abbreviation is displayed on the Format toolbar.The long name is displayed in the ToolTips of the Select, Set Layersdialog box.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 173
When you create a project, you can decide whether you want to usethe layer structure of the office standard or a project-specific layerstructure. Detailed information is provided in Using ProjectResources.
You can save layer structures and give them names. If you haveassigned linestyles, they are saved together with the layer structure(with the same file name plus the extension .sty). When importing asaved layer structure, you can import this linestyle file, too.
Using design groups
Access privileges can be controlled at layer level by means of designgroups. Design groups are generally assigned when there are severalpeople working on the same project: When installing withWorkgroup Manager, the individual users are assigned to one orseveral design groups, Thus, the users can only see and/or modify thelayers to which the relevant design group is granted access rights.
Layers for the Architectdesign group
Layers for the RelocationPlanner design group
Layers for the ElectricalDesigner design group
Other layers
Other layers
Electricaldesigner
Architect
Relocationplanner
All Layers Design Groups Users
Fisher
Smith
Clark
Miller
174 Using Layers Allplan 2005
Design groups not only control who accesses which layers. Bydefining design groups with a selection of layers that are availablewhile drawing, the entire design process can be facilitated.
The design group called ALLPLAN is created automatically after theprogram has been installed. This group has read and write access forall layers. Thus, all users can see and modify all layers.
Using layer sets
A layer set is a set of layers that you can select when compiling andarranging layouts. You can also use layer sets control which layersare visible/hidden. Only the elements in the selected layer set aredisplayed in the layout.
For example, you can select a layer set for working drawings so thatonly the data that is relevant to a working drawing appears in thefinal printout.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 175
Creating a ProjectWe will start by creating a project for the exercises in the units thatfollow.
To create a project
1 On the File menu, click ProjectPilot / Admin....
ProjectPilot opens.
2 In ProjectPilot, click New Project… on the File menu.
3 Enter the project name Tutorial, enable the Same folder name asproject name option and click Next.
176 Creating a Project Allplan 2005
4 Set the layer structure and linetypes to Project and press Next toconfirm.
5 Confirm the last dialog box with Finish.
6 Exit ProjectPilot by clicking Exit on the File menu.
You are back in Allplan 2005 in the project Tutorial.
Path settingsThese define whether the pens, linetypes, hatching styles, fontsand material catalogs available in that project are based on theoffice standard or whether they are project-specific. In practice,the office standard is generally used.
Office:
Choose this option if you want different projects within the sameoffice to use the same settings (for hatching, linetypes etc.). Ifyou are working in a network, the office standard is the same onall computers and can only be changed by users with specialprivileges.
Project:
Choose this option if you want the settings, for instance forpatterns and/or hatching styles, to apply to this project only (inwhich case they will probably be different to those used as theoffice standard).
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 177
Creating a FilesetFor the exercises that follow, you will create your own, simpleproject structure. In the case of case of a ‘live’ project, werecommend that you organize your data by story and layer sets(see “Tips on Project Organization", page 180).
To create a fileset
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis.
2 Close the drawing file tree for fileset 0 by clicking the minus signbeside the fileset called <No fileset> in the Files and Filesetsdialog box.Or click Collapse All Filesets displayed in the toolbar at thetop.
3 Click Create Fileset at top left, enter the fileset nameBasement and press ENTER to confirm.
4 Create the filesets Elevator pit, Standard lintel, Slabreinforcement and BAMTEC in the same way.
5 Click Show/Hide Drawing File List.
Tip: To open a detailingwindow in a drawing file(displaying a section of thedrawing at a larger scale), thedrawing file must belong to afileset.
178 Creating a Fileset Allplan 2005
6 Click drawing file 101, press the SHIFT key and clickdrawing file 110.
This selects drawing files 101 to 110.
7 Click within the selection and drag it to the fileset Basement andrelease the mouse button again.
The drawing file tree for the fileset opens. The drawing files arethus assigned to the fileset.If you have selected a drawing file too many, you can drag it outof the list in the same way.
Note: As an alternative to dragging & dropping, you can alsoselect the fileset, select the drawing files and, on the shortcutmenu, click Assign to current fileset.
Tip: You select the drawingfiles as in Windows® Explorer:
Press the CTRL key to select aseries of non-adjacentdrawing files(e.g., 10, 16 and 28).
Press the SHIFT key to selecta range of adjacent drawingfiles (e.g. 10 – 20).Or open a selection rectanglearound selected drawing fileswith the mouse.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 179
8 Now assign drawing files to the other filesets in the same wayand using the information in the table below.
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
1 101 3D plan
102 2D plan
103 2D stairs
104 Dimensions and labels
105 3D hidden line image
110 Key plan
2 101 3D plan
201 3D modeling
202 Component modeler
203 Walls, openings, components.
204 3D views and sections
205 Bar reinforcement, model on
3 301 2D shell
302 Bar reinforcement, model on
303 Modified door lintel
4 102 2D plan
401 Reinforcement, bottom layer, model off
402 Reinforcement, top layer, model off
5 501 Structure
502 Carpet geometry
503
504
9 Name the drawing files as shown.Naming drawing files was dealt with in unit 2.
10 Select a drawing file and click Close.
Notes:For the filesets 2 and 4, youwill use the floor plan of thebasement created in exercise3. It is not necessary to copyor create it from scratch. Allyou need to do is assigndrawing files 101 and 102 tothe filesets 2 and 4.
Assign the empty drawingfiles 503 and 504 to fileset 5.We will place the separatedcarpet outline in thesedrawing files in a laterchapter.
180 Tips on Project Organization Allplan 2005
Tips on Project OrganizationAllplan is a very flexible system that allows you to develop your owncustom solutions for projects within the office. The structurepresented here for large-scale projects is intended only as a guide.You can use the entire structure or just parts of it.
You will probably find this structure useful when you start. As youprogress, you will be in a better position to judge what needschanging/adding to suit your own needs and requirements. Wewould like to emphasize once again that a carefully though outproject structure will save time for everybody in the long run. Thesystem has the following structure:
• General project-related information is stored on drawing files 1-99. This is universally required data (plan layout, axis systemetc.).
• Story design starts at drawing file 100, starting with the buildingpit. Use the drawing files starting at number 300 for the key plan.
• Use the drawing files starting at number 1000 for formwork andshell drawings. The first digit indicates the number of the story.The last two digits provide information on the contents. Thesequence in which the drawing files are named should beidentical on each floor.
• Use the drawing files starting at number 2000 for reinforcementdrawings All edits are stored on drawing files 2000-2009. Use thefollowing drawing files for precast units and special components.
This example largely reflects the program’s project organization forengineering which you can select in the ProjectPilot when creating anew project.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 181
Setting Up LayersWhen you created the project, you set the layer structure to Project.All the settings you make, therefore, will apply to this tutorial projectonly.The office standard is thus unaffected by any changes. You willprobably use the office standard in your daily work. The officestandard's settings are defined by the system administrator and applyfor the entire office.
Allplan provides a very extensive layer structure designed to meet abroad range of requirements.You can also define your own layer categories/hierarchies and layers.For this guide you will be using the layers in the main architecturaland engineering categories.
You can specify whether the format properties (pen, line, and color)are based on your custom settings, whether these properties areproposed by the program and displayed on the Format toolbar (youcan modify them at any time) or whether these attributes are alwaystaken from the relevant layers (from the linestyle or the settingassigned to the layer).
In the tutorial, we will work independently of the selected layerproperties and make these settings while drawing.We will start by making basic layer settings.
To define basic settings for layers
1 Click Select, Set Layers (Format menu).
The Select Layer/Visibility tab is active.
2 Enable the Auto-select layer with menu check box.
3 If necessary, disable all the check boxes in the Layer’s formatproperties area.
4 Enable the Use a set color to display elements on frozen layerscheck box and select color 25.
This is the color used to display drawing files open in referencemode (as set in the Global Options).
Tip: The From Layer setting inthe Layer’s Format Propertiesarea on the FormatDefinition tab is disabled bydefault. Thus, the check boxesin the Layer’s FormatProperties area on the SelectLayer/Visibility tab are notavailable.
182 Setting Up Layers Allplan 2005
Note: You can use the , and buttons at top left to enableand disable the tree structure of the layers and to look for specificentries.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 183
Defining layer sets
A layer set is a saved combination of visible and hidden layers.Both when setting up your layouts and when turning layers on andoff, activating a layer set is a rapid way of showing/hiding onlythose layers that are required for a specific situation. First create andname the layer sets. Then assign layers to these layer sets.
To define layer sets
� The Layer dialog box is still open.
1 Select the Layer Sets tab and click Define and Modify LayerSets....
2 In the Layer Set Manager dialog box, click New layer set....
3 Name the first layer set Key plan and click OK to confirm yourentry.
184 Setting Up Layers Allplan 2005
4 If you are working with workgroup manager, assign the user localto the layer set.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 3 (4) and create more layer sets:
- Shell drawing
- Reinforcement, bottom layer
- Reinforcement, top layer
6 Press OK to confirm the entries you have made in the layer setmanager.
Now you need to define which layers are to be visible and whichhidden in each layer set.
To define visible and hidden layers for the layer sets
� The Layer dialog box is still open. The first layer set Key plan isdisplayed.
1 Click the button at top left to close the tree structure.
2 As only a few layers are to be visible, start by setting all layers toHidden. To do this, select the layer structures Architecture,Engineering and Precast Units click the selection with the rightmouse button and click Hidden on the shortcut menu.
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 185
3 Open the Draft, Dimension line and Key plan areas by clickingthe plus sign, press the CTRL key and select the layers which areto be visible in the Key plan layer set (see table below).
4 Click the selection with the right mouse button and click Visibleon the shortcut menu.
Make sure that you select individual layers (and not layerstructures or even the entire layer hierarchy!).
186 Setting Up Layers Allplan 2005
5 Click Apply to save the current setting.
6 Select the next layer set in the Layer set in list box area andmake the relevant settings (see table below).
Tip: You can also start by copying the settings from a layer setyou have already defined and customize them.
Category Layer Abbrev. Key plan Shelldrawing
Reinf.,bottomlayer
Reinf.,top layer
Design General 01 DE_GEN01 �
General 02 DE_GEN02 � � � �
Surface elements Hatching SU_HATCH �
Text General TX_GEN �
Dimension line General DL_GEN �
Dimension line 1:100 DL_100 � �
Architecture Wall AR_WALL �
Column AR_COL �
Slab AR_SLAB �
Beam AR_BEAM �
Shell General SH_GEN � �
Shell SH_SHELL � �
Manual Unit 3: Project Organization 187
Bar reinforcement Bar reinforcement atbottom
BR_R_B �
Bar reinforcement attop
BR_R_T �
Meshreinforcement
Mesh reinforcement atbottom
ME_M_B �
Mesh reinforcement attop
ME_M_T �
Key plan General KP_GEN �
Key plan KP_MARK �
7 When all the layer sets haven been assigned layers, click Applyand then OK.
188 Setting Up Layers Allplan 2005
Training project on the Internet
If you do not want to work through the entire tutorial step by step,the training project is available on the Internet so that you candownload it. It contains all the drawing files at different levels ofcompletion so that you can get started wherever you want. Forexample, you do not need to draw the walls first. Just open thecorresponding drawing file and start inserting windows and doors.
Downloading the training project
The data used in the tutorial is provided in the library of theNemetschek ServicePlus Portal:
http://ServicePlus.Nemetschek.de
• Use your customer number and email address to register. Thisregistration is free of charge and not subject to any conditions.
After approximately five to ten minutes, you are able to accessdata and information.
• To download the training project, go tohttp://ServicePlus.Nemetschek.de � Portal � enter your userdata � homepage � library
• The library contains the project, a guide showing how to importthe project and an up-to-date version of this document as a PDF-format file.
Note: As a ServicePlus customer, you will find more step-by-stepguides on our products in the library. It usually takes one to twoworking days to make these documents available to ServicePluscustomers.
General information on Service Plus is available at the followingInternet address:
http://www.nemetschek.de/servicePlus
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 189
Unit 4: Floor Plan and ShellDrawing
In this chapter you will learn the basic functions foreffectively creating shell drawings.
� You will create a floor plan for a basement as a3D model using the tools in the Walls, Openings,Components module. You will also learn aboutviewports.Alternatively, you will create a simple 2D floor plan ofa basement using the tools in the Draft module.
� Using the tools in the 3D Modeling module, youwill create a simple 3D shell drawing of an elevatorpit.Alternatively, you will create the same 3D shelldrawing of an elevator pit once again. But this timeyou will use the tools in the Walls, Openings,Components module.
You should work your way through these exercises stepby step as we will need the results in later chapters.
190 Overview of Exercises Allplan 2005
Overview of Exercises
Exercise 3: floor plan of basement and viewports
You will design the floor plan of a basement as a 3D model using thetools in the Walls, Openings, Components module. Afterwards,you will draw the same floor plan as a 2D drawing sing the tools inthe Draft module.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 191
Exercise 4: 3D elevator pit
You will draw an elevator pit for the basement you have created inexercise three using the tools in the 3D Modeling module. As analternative you will create the same elevator pit using the tools in the
Walls, Openings, Components module.
192 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthe Walls, Openings, Components module.
In this exercise you will create a floor plan for a basement.
To do this, you will mainly use the tools in the Walls, Openings,Components module. You can select these tools via the Create,Create II and Modify flyouts on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Furthermore, you will also learn about viewports.
Finally, you will create the walls of the basement as a 2D design.
Start by selecting fileset 1 with the following drawing files:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
K
1 101 3D plan
102 2D plan
103 2D stairs
104 Dimensions and labels
105 3D hidden line image
110 Key plan
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 193
Creating the 3D model using the Walls, Openings, Components module
If you have not licensed the Walls, Openings, Componentsmodule, create the floor plan in 2D (see page 240), dimension it andcreate the stairs (see page 230).
Tools: Objective:
Wall
Join Walls
3 Viewports
Hidden LineImage
Save, LoadView
Vie
wpo
rts
Column
Downstand Beam,Upstand Beam
Door
Window
Hidden Line Image,Wireframe
Slab
Slab Recess, Opening
194 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Settings
Start by making initial settings.
To select a drawing file and to set options
1 In the CAD Navigator select the Walls, Openings,Components module in the Architecture family.
2 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),open the drawing file tree for fileset 1 by clicking the plus signbeside the name of the fileset and double-click drawing file 101.
3 In the status bar, click the Scale currently set and select 1:100;click the Length and select m.
4 Click Options (Standard toolbar) and select Architecture.
5 Switch to the Display tab, enable the Fixed pen for hatchingapplied to components, rooms check box, select a pen thicknessof 0.25 mm and click OK.
6 On the Format toolbar, select a pen thickness of 0.50 mm andlinetype 1.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 195
Walls
When you work with the tools in the architectural modules, youare effectively working in three-dimensional space. To accuratelydefine the position of a component (wall, door, window etc.) inspace, it is necessary to know the height of the component’s topand bottom levels. The height is entered using absolute values.
For the basement in the building we will be assuming the followingsettings:The elevation of the floor slab’s finished floor is –2.70 m. We will beworking using unfinished dimensions. Thus, the elevation of theunfinished floor will be –2.79 m. The elevation of the bottom levelof the slab is –0.31 m.
The position of a wall is defined by its start and end points andan offset direction relative to an imaginary line between the startand end point.
To ensure that the wall is displayed true-to-scale, you can defineits thickness. You can select a hatching or a fill for the display ofintersected walls.
By setting the height of the wall, you ensure that Allplan 2005can generate a 3D model based on the floor plan. It is alsopossible to set additional parameters such as a material andbuilding trade.
This exercise involves creating the walls in the basement. We willignore quantity takeoff issues. It is therefore enough if we just definethe wall thickness and height and select a hatching style.
196 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
We will start by defining the wall parameters.
To set wall parameters
1 Click Wall (Create flyout).
2 On the Wall Context toolbar, click Properties. The Walldialog box opens.
3 Enter the following information:
• In the Setup, number of layers area, enable the wall type 1:wall with a single construction layer.
• In the graphics area, use the cursor to move the componentaxis to an edge of the wall.
The position of the component axis controls the wall's offsetdirection. The component axis can be at a side of the wall oranywhere within the wall.
4 Enter the following information in the Parameters, Attributestab:
• In the first row, click the Thickness column.
• In the list box that appears, click , type 0.300 and pressOK. (This selects the entry '0.3000' and adds it to the list.)
• Click the Priority column and enter 300 (analogous tothickness).
The priority rating controls the manner in which componentsintersect. Components with a lower priority rating have a 'hole'cut in them where they are intersected by other components. Thisensures that these areas are not counted twice in subsequentquantity takeoff operations.
• For the computation mode select: Volume.
• Set Interaction to dynamic.
• Enable the Auto-Join check box.
Tip: When setting the wall’spriority rating:thickness of wall in mm.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 197
The Wall dialog box should now look like this:
5 The settings from the Format toolbar are used for the FormatProperties tab. At the moment the tab looks like this:
Note: The settings in the Format toolbar have no effect on theformat properties of walls.
6 Enter the following information in the Display of areas tab:
• Check the Hatching option.Click the field below the button and select hatching stylenumber 7.
198 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
The Display of areas tab should now look like this:
7 Now click the button marked Setup and enter settings in theHeight dialog box. We will enter the top and bottom level of thewall as absolute values. Click the relevant elevation triangle.
• Wall’s top level (= bottom level of slab): –0.31.
• Wall’s bottom level (= bottom level of floor slab): –2.79.
8 Press OK to confirm the Height and Wall dialog boxes.
Entering data in property sheets
To enter a value, click in the data entry field. Enter the value atthe keyboard and press ENTER.
To enter and add values in custom list boxes, click first.
To apply entries, press OK.
To discard entries, press Cancel or ESC.
Tip: The parameters you setare retained in the dialog boxuntil you change them.
Tip: For more information onthe Wall tool, press
F1The description of the tool inthe online Help is displayed.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 199
Component axis, general information
Components are entered along their component axis. The wall’sdirection of extension depends on the position of the componentaxis, the direction in which the wall is entered and the position ofthe first construction layer in the wall. Click Rotate aboutaxis on the Wall Context toolbar to change the wall's direction ofextension.
You can position the component axis as follows:
• Centered in or on the sides of the entire component (wall as awhole)
• Centered in or on the sides of the each construction layer
• At a freely definable distance to a component edge (wall edge)
Small boxes in the preview indicate the positions you can select.
A Component axisB Possible positions on the sides of/centered in the layer or entire wallC Number of construction layers
200 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
You can place the component axis in several ways:
• IntuitiveUse the mouse to move the axis: the cursor becomes a doublearrow, and the component axis will snap to the positions markedby small black boxes. The values displayed on the left of thepreview show the distance to the edges.
• Centered in or on the sides of a construction layer or of theentire wall/upstandIn the Position column, click the icon of the construction layer orof the entire wall/upstand in which you want to position the axisand select the desired position. The values displayed on the left ofthe preview show the distance to the edges.
Left edge of component or construction layer Right of component or construction layer In the middle of component or construction layer Freely definable (for Total wall only)
• Freely definable position by entering a valueClick one of the data entry boxes on the left of the preview areaand enter any value for the offset of the axis to the wall edge.The program automatically calculates the value for the other sideand displays the Free position icon in the Total thicknessarea.
Offset direction of components, single-tier walls
Components are entered along the component axis. Depending onthe position of the axis within the component, you can use thedirection of extension to specify on which side of the componentaxis (relative to the direction in which the component is entered) thecomponent is to be drawn. With Rotate about axis, you havethe option to “tilt" the wall or to reverse the setup of the constructionlayers.
The direction is indicated by an arrow and by the position of the firstconstruction layer. This can be enabled/disabled in the PointEntry Options, Scan, Display tab.
Tip: Using the offsetdirection, you can quicklytoggle between inner andouter dimensions whenentering walls.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 201
Depending on the position of the component axis, the followingoptions are available:
• Single-tier wall, lateral component axis:
1 Start point of component2 End point of componentA Component axisB ExtensionC Direction in which component is entered
After clicking Rotate about axis:
1 Start point of component2 End point of componentA Component axisB ExtensionC Direction in which component is entered
• Single-tier wall, centered component axis:Clicking Rotate about axis does not make any difference.
202 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
When all the parameters have been set, you can draw the walls. Inthis exercise, the values are outside dimensions. Therefore, the wall’soffset direction is towards the interior.
To draw exterior walls
1 Click the wall type Straight Wall.
2 Define properties or place the start pointPlace the starting point in the workspace.
A preview of the wall should now be visible attached to thecrosshairs.
3 Check and define the wall’s offset direction:
• In the Wall dialog box, you have defined a lateral wall axis(= line you enter).
• The values are outside dimensions (see illustration below).Start with a horizontal wall at bottom left.As the starting point is on the outside, the wall’s offsetdirection is to the top (= towards the interior).
• Check the offset direction based on the preview of the wallattached to the crosshairs. The small arrow should point to thetop (= inwards).
• If not, click Rotate about axis on the Wall Contexttoolbar to reverse the wall's offset direction.
4 Enter a value of 3.51 for the X Coordinate in the dialog line.
Now draw the next walls as you would a polyline, specifying thedX and dY values for the length of the walls in the dialog line:
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 203
5 Enter the following values:
dY : 1.0 dX : 5.19
dY : -1.0 dX : 4.505
dY : 16.45 dX : -3.205
dY : 1.0 dX : -3.275
dY : -1.0 dX : -3.275
dY : 1.0 dX : -3.45
dY : -8.375 dX : -1.2
dY : -3.0 dX : 1.2
dY : -6.075
2
Offset direction
6 The wall polyline closes automatically.Press ESC to quit the Wall tool.
Tip: If you can’t see the entiredesign, go to the lowerborder of the viewport andclick Refresh.
204 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
To draw the interior walls, we need to change the wall properties. Wewill change the thickness and the priority rating. The height of thewall is the same.
To draw interior walls
� The Walls, Openings, Components module is active.
1 Double click an exterior wall with the right mouse button.
This activates the Wall tool and gets the element's propertiesat the same time. Defining the height, for example, is no longernecessary.
2 Click Straight Wall.
3 Modify the following Properties:
• in the Parameters, Attributes tab:Thickness (m) = 0.24Priority = 240
• in the Format Properties tab:Pen = 0.35 mm
and press OK to confirm.
4 Define properties or place the start pointDraw the first horizontal interior wall by placing the startingpoint on the bottom left corner of the wall (see illustration below)in the area of the stairwell. Observe the wall’s offset direction inthe preview and, if necessary, change the it by clicking
Rotate about axis.
5 Enter a value of 5.815 for the X Coordinate. Then enter avalue of 2.40 for the Y Coordinate.
6
4
dY = 2.40dX = 5.815
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 205
6 Close the wall outline by clicking the corner of the exterior wallat the top.
7 Click the point at top right to set the starting point for theelevator walls (see illustration below).
8 Enter a value of 1.78 for the X Coordinate.
9 enter a value of –2.48 for the Y Coordinate and then –1.00for the X Coordinate.
7
10 Press ESC to close the wall polyline and to quit the Wall tool.
To design the next wall, we will use the Join Walls tool. This toolcan be used to extend a wall as far as another wall.
To join walls
1 Right-click the elevator wall you want to lengthen.
2 Select Join Walls on the shortcut menu. Check that the jointwidth is set to 0.00. If it isn’t, set it to this value in the dialogline.
3 Click the exterior wall through to which the wall is to extend.
3
1
4
4
4 Lengthen the elevator wall as far as the wall of the stairwell andquit the tool.
Tip: You can also quit tools byright clicking a toolbarinstead of pressing ESC.
206 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
To design more interior walls, you will use the reference point ofexisting walls and the ortho-constraint placement method. After youhave drawn the interior wall at top left, you should be able to createthe other walls yourself using the information provided in theillustration below.
To draw more interior walls
1 Click Wall (Create flyout).
2 Click Straight Wall.
3 Click the first interior wall corner at top right (see illustrationbelow) and specify the offset direction towards the right/bottom.
4 On the Dynamic toolbar, click Ortho Constraint.
5 Enter the length of the wall as follows: dX = 0 and dY = -7.78.
6 Click the point at the bottom where the interior wall you createdearlier and the exterior wall intersect to define the end point ofthe wall.
7 To set the starting point of the horizontal wall at the top, click theline on the right of the vertical wall you have just created. Thereference point is displayed.
8 If required, move the reference point onto the bottom left cornerand enter the distance between the reference point and the startof the wall: 1.40.
9 On the Dynamic toolbar Ortho Constraint is still active.Check that the offset direction is towards the top and click thewall corner at bottom right.
10 Now draw the other interior walls yourself.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 207
3
9
7
6
11 The wall polyline closes automatically. Press ESC to quit the Wall tool.
208 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Views and viewports
When working with walls and other components, you can get animpression of how the building looks in 3D space at the click of amouse button. Each viewport has its own set of viewing tools in thelower viewport border.
With Allplan 2005 you can display a number of different views onscreen simultaneously and work in all of them. Each viewport cancontain a section, the entire design or an isometric view.You can select from one of the standard viewport arrangementsprovided and then modify it to suit your needs.
Select the screen arrangement on the Window menu.
Each viewport has icons in its lower border. These were covered inthe "Basics" unit.
Refresh
Zoom Section
Pan
Regen
Reduce View
Enlarge View
Scroll Left, ...
Plan
Rear Left Iso.
Rear Elev.
Rear Right Iso.
Left Elev.
Right Elev.
Front Left Iso.
Front Elev.
Front Right Iso.
3D View
Navigation Mode
Previous View
Next View
Save, Load View
Always on Top (on)
Always on Top (off)
Hidden Line Image
Activate Section
Copy to Clipboard
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 209
The following exercise will help you understand how the viewportswork.
How to set viewports: detailed view and full view
1 On the Window menu, click 3 Viewport.
2 Click on Plan View in the viewport at top left.
3 Click Zoom Section in the border of the viewport on the right.
4 Define a section in the viewport at top left.The section is displayed in the viewport where you clicked
Zoom Section (here: in the viewport on the right).Using this approach, you can work on details in your designwhile still displaying the entire model/floor plan in anotherviewport.
210 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
To create a hidden line image
1 Click 3 Viewports.
2 In the border of the viewport at top left, select Hidden LineImage..
3 Click Regen in the border of the same viewport.The hidden-line image is displayed.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 211
To save a view
1 Use Zoom Section to define a section you want to view inplan view (viewport on the right).
2 Click Save, Load View.
3 In the Save, Load View dialog box, click New, enter a name forthe view and select Load.
The view is now active (the icon is pressed in); in other words,when you click Refresh, the active view is displayed.
4 Disable Save, Load View again (icon is not pressed in) andclick Refresh.
This displays the image in its entirety again.
5 On the Window menu, click 1 Viewport. This disables thehidden-line image.
Tip: You can calculatehidden-line images and saveviews in any viewport byclicking the relevant icon.
212 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Columns
The basement of the floor plan needs a column.
To draw a column
� The view is set to plan view and drawing file 101 is active.Linetype 1 and pen thickness 0.50 mm are set.
1 Click Column (Create flyout).Check that the layer AR_COL is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
2 On the Column Context toolbar, click Properties.
3 In the Column dialog box, set the parameters as shown above:Shape of outline: rectangularWidth: 0.25 mThickness: 0.40 mPriority: 250Hatching: 7
Tip: You can use the Columntool for any kind of column-shaped elements – not onlyround and rectangularcolumns but also small flushpiers.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 213
4 Click the Setup button and enter the height of the column usingabsolute values:
• Top level: –0.51.
• Bottom level: –2.79.
5 Confirm both dialog boxes.
6 On the Column Context toolbar, set the Anchor point forpreview to bottom right.
7
7 Point to the interior corner (see above).
This corner will now serve as the reference point for furtherentries. The data entry fields in the dialog line are highlighted inyellow.
8 Enter a value of 0.00 for the X Coordinate in the dialog lineand a value of 2.85 for the Y Coordinate.Press ENTER to confirm.
The column is positioned.
9 Press ESC to quit the tool.
214 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Assigning layers
For walls and upstands, layers and other format properties like pen,
line and color are assigned in the Properties dialog box.
In general, the appropriate layer for the selected tool is activatedautomatically (provided you set the layers as described in unit 3“Project Organization”).If it isn't or you want to use a different layer, do the following.
To select the active layer
� The Column tool is active.The dialog box with the properties is closed.
1 Click in the Select, Set Layers list box (Format toolbar).
2 If the layer AR_ST is available in the quick selection list, click it.
3 If the layer AR_ST is not presented in the quick selection list,click Set… and double click the layer in the dialog box toselect it.
Tip: Selecting layers
Always proceed as follows:
- Start by selecting the function.
- Check the layer’sabbreviation displayed inthe Format toolbar.
- Switch layer if necessary.
Tip: To see which layers arealready in use, click
Select, Set Layers on theFormat menu and select theList existing layers in opendrawing files option in theList box contents area.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 215
Beam
Now you create a beam over the column.
To draw a beam
1 Click Downstand Beam, Upstand Beam (Create flyout) andclick Properties on the Context toolbar.
2 Enter the other settings for the beam so that they match those inthe figure above.Thickness: 0.25 mPriority: 250Pen: 0.35 mmHatching: 7
3 Check that the layer AR_BEAM is selected. If it isn't, activate it.
4 Click the icons representing the height end enter the height of thebeam using absolute values:
• Top level: –0.31.
• Bottom level: –0.51.
216 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
5 Confirm both dialog boxes.
6 Click the starting point (see below).
7 On the Dynamic toolbar, click Ortho Constraint and enter 0for the dX value.
8 Observe the beam’s offset direction in the preview and, ifnecessary, change it by clicking Rotate about axis.
9 To define the end point of the beam, click the horizontal wall.As the data entry mode is set to ortho constraint, you can alsoclick a corner of the wall.
The beam is drawn.
6
9
10 Press ESC to finish entering the beam.
11 To check its position, select an isometric view on the View menuor open multiple viewports.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 217
Openings
Doors and windows are openings, as are niches and recesses. Theprocedure for creating openings is always the same, regardless ofthe type of opening. The differences lie in the settings you canmake; these vary depending on the type of opening you select.Walls and openings are ‘inherently’ linked. A wall ‘knows’ aboutthe openings in it – an opening in a wall will move with thewall.
All the doors in the basement are single-leaf doors and, except forthe doors to the stairwell and the elevator, they are 0.885 m wideand 2.10 m high. We will not be using smart symbols here. We willmerely draw the door opening. To display the door lintel, we willenable the reveal option.The procedure for creating door openings also applies to all otherkinds of openings.
Entering openings
• Place the first side of the opening
• Enter properties and set the height
• Enter the width of the opening
You only have to make the settings for the opening once if you wantto create a series of identical openings. The properties and the heightinformation are stored by the system until you redefine them.
Tip: You can namecombinations of settings andsave them as favorites.You can use to copysettings from existingcomponents.
218 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
To create door openings
� You should still be in the Walls, Openings, Components module.
1 Click Door (Create flyout).A preview of the door opening is displayed attached to thecrosshairs.
The layer AR_MAK is proposed for placing a smart symbol in theopening. Openings always have the same layer as the componentinto which they are inserted, regardless which layer is currentlyactive.The layer setting has no significance in this context.
2 On the Door Context toolbar, set the Anchor point forpreview to bottom right and enter a value of 0.00 for the
Offset to Reference Point in the dialog line. Now you canenter a reference point.
3 Click a point on the outside of the stairwell wall roughly whereyou want to insert the door (see the following illustration).The reference point is displayed as an arrow and the distancebetween this and the point clicked is displayed in the dialog line.
4 Check the position of the reference point and, if necessary, moveit to the inside corner at top left. For the offset, enter 3.825 m inthe dialog line.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 219
5 Click Properties.
6 Select the rectangle for the type.
7 Click the button in the Door swing area and click Off toprevent a door swing symbol from being displayed.
220 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
8 Click the Setup button and enter the height of the top and bottomlevels of the door as absolute values.For the bottom level, enter –2.79. The top level is based on thedoor height plus the thickness of the floor (0.09 cm). Enter -0.69.
9 Press OK to confirm the dialog box.
10 In the Door strip area, select the Both sides option.Select pen 0.35 mm for the strip; leave the line and color settingsunchanged.
11 Press OK to confirm the dialog box.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 221
12 Enter the width of the opening in the dialog line: 1.01 m.The door opening is drawn.
13 Now draw all the other door openings yourself. For all the interiordoors (except for the elevator door which is 2.25 m high) youmerely have to enter the width of the opening in the dialog line.Make sure that the offsets are correct. For the elevator door,change the height in the dialog box:Bottom level = -2.79; top level = -0.54.
14 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: You can set a differentanchor point (left, right orcentered) on the DoorContext toolbar.
Tip: To quickly check thedesign visually in 3D space,select an isometric view onthe View menu, then click
followed by in theborder of the viewport.
222 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
In the following exercise, we will insert the window openings in thewalls. Some of the window openings will be wider and higher thanothers and the height of the sill in each opening is also different.Like the doors, the windows will also be drawn with a reveal.
You should be familiar with the approach from the previousexercises. Set the height, select the window shape and position theopening in the plan.
To create window openings
1 Click Window Opening (Create flyout).
2 On the Window Opening Context toolbar, set the Anchorpoint for preview to bottom right and check that the
Offset to Reference Point is set to 0.00 in the dialog line.If it isn’t, enter it.
3 Click the line representing the exterior of the wall at top left andenter the offset to the reference point in the dialog line.
4 Click Properties.
Tip: If you need, you canchange how the opening isattached to the cursor on theWindow Context toolbar.Moreover, you can also clickanother corner to move thearrow marking the referencepoint.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 223
5 The dimensions of the window openings are 80 by 60 cm. With alintel of 20 cm, the top level of the openings is at –0.51 and thebottom level at –1.11.Click the Setup button and enter the height as absolute values.
6 In the Sill area, select the Both sides option.Do not change the pen, line and color settings of the sill.
7 Press OK to confirm the dialog box.
224 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
8 Now draw the windows using the information provided in theillustration. Do not forget to change the settings for the exteriorwall on the left.You can modify the settings in two ways:
• Set the height of the sill to –1.31 and the height of theopening to 0.80.
• or click the Setup button and change the bottom level to –1.31.
9 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Defining the reference point
If you do not want to accept the reference point proposed by thesystem, you can
• set another point on the wall or
• click a point beyond the line. The base of the perpendiculardropped from this point onto the wall serves as the newreference point.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 225
Design check
By generating a hidden-line image, you can check whether theentries you have made so far are correct and whether the door andwindow openings have been placed correctly. The hidden-line imagecan be saved automatically to a drawing file of your choice.
To copy the 3D view to another drawing file
1 In the border of the viewport, click Front Right Iso.
2 On the Standard toolbar, select Hidden Line Image,Wireframe.
3 In the Hidden Line Image, Wireframe dialog box, click HiddenLine Image to File and select drawing file 105 in the next dialogbox.
226 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
4 Press OK to confirm the dialog box.
5 Click Open on an project-specific basis and double-clickdrawing file 105 to make it current.
As the isometric view is still active, nothing is displayed in theworkspace.
6 In the border of the viewport, click Plan.
7 Your workspace should now look like this.If you need, you can click Print to output the image to theprinter.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 227
Dimensioning
Now you will dimension the plan using the tools in the Dimension Lines module. Use the Dimension Lines flyout on the
Basic Tools toolbar.
• Make drawing file 104 current, open drawing file 101 in editmode and close all other drawing files.
• Check the current Scale in the status bar and, if required,set it to 1:100.
• Place the dimensions for the doors, windows and the downstandbeam on the DL_GEN layer and the wall dimensioning on theDL_100 layer.
228 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Turning layers on and off
To check whether the dimension lines are on the correct layers, wewill now set the dimension line layer of the openings (DL_GEN) tovisible and frozen.
To turn layers on and off
1 On the Format menu, click Select, Set Layers.
2 Select the List existing layers in open drawing files option andclick the button at top left to open the tree structure.
3 click the layer DL_GEN General with the right mouse buttonand select Visible, frozen.
4 Press OK to confirm.The dimension lines placed on the layer DL_GEN are displayedusing the color you selected for elements on frozen layers: 25.
To set the frozen layer to modifiable again, right-click a dimensionline displayed using the color representing elements on frozen layers,select Modify Layer Status on the shortcut menu and clickModifiable.
Tip: If you change the statusof the current layer, theDEFAULT layer becomes thecurrent one.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 229
What to do when elements are no longer visible?
• On the Format menu, click Select, Set Layers and make allthe layers visible.
• If the elements are still not visible, then this may be because theselected user group does not have the necessary privileges. In thiscase, in the Layer dialog box in the Current design group listbox, select a user group with all rights or contact your systemadministrator and ask him/her to assign you a user group.
Which layer is the element on?
• You can find out which layers individual elements are on byturning each individual layer on using the Select, Set Layerstool on the Format toolbar.
• You can find out which layer an element is on by clicking theelement with the right mouse button and selecting FormatProperties.All the properties including the layer are displayed.You can even change the layer of the element currently selected.But the layers of associated components (e.g. window openings inwalls) are not changed in this process. We recommend that youuse Modify Format Properties.
• You can change the layer assignments of one or several elementsusing the Modify Format Properties (Edit flyout) tool. Thistool modifies the layers of associated elements, too.
230 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Stair outline
You can create stairs in two ways:
• You can model it in 3D with the tools in the Stairs module or
• You can draw it in 2D using the tools in the Draft module.
Half-space landings and flights of stairs are often created as precastunits and do not need to be designed or reinforced. Consequently, inthe following exercise, we will draw the stair outline using the toolsin the Draft module. The following exercise has a "rough designguideline" - tools that you have already encountered are no longerexplained in detail.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 231
To draw the stair outline
1 Make drawing file 103 current, open drawing file 101 in editmode and close all other drawing files. Select a pen thickness of0.13 mm.
2 Use Line, Rectangle and Parallel Lines (Draft flyout)to draw the stringers and the steps.Check that the layer DE_GEN01 is selected. If it isn't, activate itvia the Format menu or toolbar.
3 In the CAD Navigator select the Draft module in the Basicfamily.
4 Use Line and Perpendic. Bisector (Create II flyout ) todraw the line of travel.
5 Use Line to draw two section lines in the stair.
6 Use Auto-Delete Segment (Draft flyout ) to delete redundantline segments.
7 Click Modify Format Properties
8 In the Modify Format Properties dialog box, enable the Linetypecheck box, select linetype 2 and press OK to confirm.
Tip: If you want to select atool you have already usedbeforehand, you can activateit on the Repeat menu.You can choose from the 30tools you have selected mostrecently.
232 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
9 Select the element(s) you want to modifySelect the elements to which you want to apply the new linetypeand press ESC to quit the tool.
10 Make drawing file 104 current, open drawing files 101 and 103in edit mode and close all other drawing files.
11 Dimension the outline and modify the dimensioning of the door.To do this, use the right mouse button to double-click a frozenopening dimension line.
This selects the Dim. Line tool together with the layer DL_GEN.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 233
Slab
The basement now needs a slab. You can create slabs using the Slab tool. The approach is similar to that for creating walls: first
enter the properties of the component. Then enter the outline as youwould define a normal polyline.
To set the slab’s properties
1 Make drawing file 101 current and set 103 to edit mode.
2 In the CAD Navigator, select the Walls Openings,Components module, click Slab (Create flyout ) and select apen thickness of 0.50 mm.Check that the layer AR_SLAB is selected. If it isn't, activate itvia the Format menu or toolbar.
3 On the Slab Context toolbar, click Properties.
Tip: The Slab tool can beapplied in a wide range ofsituations – from the designof floor slabs to foundations.
234 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
4 Click the Setup button and enter the height of the slab asabsolute values.The unfinished floor of the ground floor = top level of the slab inthe basement = -0.11. The slab is 20 cm thick. Thus, the bottomlevel = -0.31.
5 Press OK to confirm the height settings, define the Priority ratingand select a Hatching style.Do not close the Slab dialog box as it is needed in the nextexercise.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 235
As is the case with all element settings, the slab properties do nothave to be entered from scratch each time. You can savecombinations of settings as favorites under a name of your choice.
To save component properties as a favorite
� The Slab tool is still active and the dialog box is open. If not,activate the tool and click Properties.
1 In the bottom left corner of the dialog box, click .
2 Click the Project folder, enter a name of your choice and clickSave to confirm.
3 Press OK to confirm the Slab dialog box.
The next time you need a slab with these settings, click and thenthe name of the file:The values in the dialog box will change automatically.
Now we will define the position of the slab. We will do this using thepolyline entry tools. These allow you to map the outline in a singlestep. The only requirement is that you click an element in thepolyline and not a point.
236 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
General polyline entry tools
You can use these tools to enter or map any outline.
Polygonize entire element: the start point also serves to specify the direction. In the case ofcircles and curves, you also need to enter a value for the number of segments in the circle orarc/curve.
Define portion of element to be polygonized: generates a polyline based on a portion of anelement. The portion is defined using a ‘from’ and a ‘to’ point.
Reference point: identifies a point on the element as the starting point for the new element.This starting point is determined by clicking a point on the element and entering an offsetvalue between it and the nearest significant point (displayed as an arrow).
Find closed polylines: click a point on a polyline and the system will detect the entireboundary.
To create the slab using the polyline entry tools
1 Define properties, place polygon point 1 or enter offset: Click aline representing the outside of a wall. Make sure that you do notclick the line near a point.
2 On the Dynamic toolbar, click .
3 Click a point (near to the first point) beyond the floor plan. Thesystem automatically detects the outline of the entire floor plan.
3
1
4 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 237
Now we need to insert an opening in the slab near the stairs toprovide access to the ground floor. You can use the Slab Recess,Opening tool to pierce slabs in their entirety. Height settings are notrequired – all you need to enter is the shape of the opening. You canchoose between a rectangular, circular, regular polygon and free-form opening,
We will also insert a slab opening for the elevator shaft. To definethe area, we will use the Outline Auto-Detect tool. Using thistool, you can detect a closed polyline simply by clicking within itsboundaries.
To create a free-form slab opening
1 Click Slab Recess, Opening (Create flyout).
2 Click the basement slab.
3 On the Slab Recess, Opening Context toolbar,click Properties.
4 In the Type area, select Slab opening and in the Shape of outlinearea, click the icon for a free-form opening.
Tip: The settings for slabrecesses and slab openings areidentical.Difference: slab recesses havetheir own height setup asthey do not pierce the slabentirely.
As with door and windowopenings, the slab opening isplaced automatically on thelayer of the component inwhich it is inserted.
238 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
5 Click the corners of the stair outline one after the other.
5 5
5
5 5
55
5
6 To finish, either click the first point again or press ESC after thelast point.This defines the slab opening for the stairs. Next, we will definethe slab opening for the elevator shaft.
7 Enable Outline Auto-Detect in the dialog line (icon must bepressed in).
8 Click in the elevator shaft. The system automatically detects thearea.
8
9 Press ESC to quit the tool.
10 In the border of the viewport, click Front Right Iso.
11 In the border of the viewport, click Hidden Line Image andthen Regen.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 239
The design should look like this:
Printing out layouts is covered in “Unit 11: Plot Layout”.
240 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Drawing the walls in the basement in 2D with the Draft module
As an alternative to the Walls, Openings, Components module,you can use the tools in the Draft module to create the walls inthe basement as a 2D design.
Use the Draft flyout on the Basic Tools toolbar to access these tools.
Tools: Objective:
Offset Polyline
Rectangle
Delete Doubled Line
Line
Parallel Lines
Auto-Delete Segment
Move
Start by making initial settings.
To select a drawing file and to set options
1 In the CAD Navigator select the Draft module.
2 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar) anddouble-click drawing file 102.
3 Check the current scale in the status bar and, if required, set it to1:100. The current length should be set to m.
4 On the Format toolbar, select pen thickness 0.50 mm andlinetype 1.
Now draw the exterior walls.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 241
Approaches
You can draw floor plans in 2D in different ways:
• The walls are created using the Line and ParallelLines tools. You used this method for drawing the title block.
• The walls are drawn using the Rectangle tool. Using thepoint snap and offset entry feature, openings can be takeninto account. This approach will be used for drawing theinterior walls.
• The walls are created using the Offset Polyline tool.
In addition to these tools, the floor plan can also be entered in 2using the tools in the Walls, Openings, Components modulewithout specifying the height (by setting the top level = bottomlevel = 0.00). This approach is the same as the proceduredescribed above.
To create the exterior walls as offset polylines
� Plan view is enabled and the Hidden-Line Image isdisabled.If not, click 1 Viewport on the Window menu.
1 Click Offset Polyline (Draft flyout).
2 Select the layer DE_GEN02 so that you can use the floor plan in2D for the key plan and the slab reinforcement.
3 Number of parallel offset lines: Enter 2.
4 Enter the offset for the parallel lines in the dialog line:1st offset: = 0; 2. Offset: = 0.30
5 Click in the workspace to define the starting point. Place it atbottom left.
6 On the Dynamic toolbar, click left to define the offset direction,use the X Coordinate and Y Coordinate data entry fieldsin the dialog line to enter the values in the x and y direction asshown below and press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: When you enter anegative offset, the offsetpolyline is drawn in acontrary direction to that inwhich you are drawing.
242 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
Use the TAB key to switch between the data entry fields.
dX = 3.51 dX = 5.19 dX = 4.505 dX = -3.205 dX = -3.275 dX = -3.275 dX = -3.45 dX = -1.20 dX = 1.20
dY = 1.00 dY = -1.00 dY = 16.45 dY = 1.00 dY = -1.00 dY = 1.00 dY = -8.375 dY = -3.00 dY = -6.075
Tip: When you have made awrong entry, press ESC and
Delete (Edit flyout ) thewrong value. then select thecommand again, click theexterior line, specify thedirection, enter the value andcontinue with the floor plan.
Tip: If the thickness values ofthe walls differ in the floorplan, you can enter the offsetvalues each time you place apoint or you can use th Modify Offset tool tocorrect the offset betweenthe parallel lines after youhave finished entering thefloor plan.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 243
In the following exercise, we will enter the interior walls using the Rectangle tool. This way, door openings can be taken into
account up front. Start with the horizontal walls near the stairwell.
To draw the interior walls as rectangles
1 Click Rectangle (Draft flyout).
2 Start point:Click the re-entrant corner of the exterior wall on the left (seebelow).
2 4
3 Diagonally opposite point:For the length, enter 6.055 (= length of wall) in the
X Coordinate data entry field and for the width,enter –0.24 (= thickness of wall) in the Y Coordinate dataentry field. Press ENTER to confirm.
4 To create the vertical wall, click the top right corner of the wallyou have just created and for the length, enter –0.24 and forthe width, enter 2.40.
5 Click Delete Doubled Line (Modify flyout) and delete the twosuperimposed lines in the corner (generated by the two rectanglesyou have entered).
6 Click Rectangle and draw the exterior wall at the top of thestairwell. The starting point is the interior edge of the corner (seeillustration below). Length = 3.825, width = 0.24.
244 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
6
5
7 The Rectangle tool is still active. To define the starting pointof the next rectangle, use the point snap and offset entry feature.
8 Move the crosshairs to the bottom right corner of the wall youhave just drawn (see below). The data entry fields in the dialogline are highlighted in yellow.
9 Enter a value of 1.01 for the X Coordinate in the dialog lineand press ENTER to confirm.
10 Enter 3.00 for the length and 0.24 for the width.
8 11
11 The point where the horizontal and vertical walls intersect is alsoa doubled line. Use Delete Doubled Line (Modify flyout ) todelete it.
Tip: Bear in mind that youcan select a wide range oftools simply by clicking theelement in question with theright mouse button (when nofunction is active).
Moreover, you can activatetools you have already usedvia the Repeat menu.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 245
Following is a summary of the interior walls you can create using theinstructions on the previous pages. The point snap and offset entryfeature is used widely; you can also experiment with the ParallelLines tool.
When you have drawn all the walls, ‘clean up’ the floor plan at thepoints where the walls intersect. You can also delete the lines wherethe interior walls meet the exterior walls as all the walls have thesame material.
Use the Line tool to add the edges of the door lintels and thebeam near the column. To do this, set the pen thickness to 0.25 mm.
246 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
In the next exercise, we will insert the window openings in theexterior walls.
To draw the window openings
1 Select a pen thickness of 0.50 mm and click Line (Draftflyout).
2 Move the crosshairs to the top left corner of the exterior wall. Thedata entry fields in the dialog line are highlighted in yellow.
3 Enter a value of 0.55 for the X Coordinate in the dialog lineand press ENTER to confirm.
4 Enter a value of –0.30 for the Y Coordinate.
5 Click Parallel Lines (Draft flyout) and draw a line to the rightof the existing line at an offset of 0.80.
6 Use Auto-Delete Segment to delete the lines for the lintel anddraw the edges of the lintels for the windows using a penthickness of 0.25 mm.
2
6
6
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 247
Using the method described above, you can draw all the otherwindow openings yourself.
Do not forget to use the Copy and Copy and Resize tools.
Now use the Hatching tool (Draft flyout) to apply hatching to thewalls of the floor plan as you did in unit 2.To do this, use hatching 7 and pen thickness 0.25 mm.Check that the layer SU_HATCH is activated.
Tip: When you applyhatching, you can use the
Outline Auto-Detect tool.
248 Exercise 3: Floor Plan of Basement Allplan 2005
To finish, you will check the layers used, move the 2D floor plan sothat it is congruent with the 3D floor plan, insert the opening for thestairs and check the entire design using the Key plan and Shelldrawing layer sets.
To check the layer settings
1 On the Format menu, click Select, Set Layers.
If everything is correct, only the DE_GEN02 and SU_HATCHlayers are visible now.
2 Click the SU_HATCH layer with the right mouse button, on theshortcut menu, choose Visible, frozen and press OK to confirm.
The hatching is displayed using color 25. This is the color youhave selected for elements on frozen layers.
3 If required, modify the layer assignment and set the status of theSU_HATCH layer to Modifiable again.
To move the drawing in the workspace
1 Make drawing file 102 current and open drawing file 101 inreference mode.
2 Click Move (Edit flyout).
3 Select the entire 2D floor plan and place it so that it is congruentwith the 3D plan.
4 Use the Line tool to draw the edge of the slab in the stairwell.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 249
To check the design using layer sets
1 Set drawing file 101 to edit mode and, in addition, open thedrawing files 103 and 104 in edit mode.
2 On the Format menu, click Select, Set Layers.
3 Click in the layer structure with the right mouse button and, onthe shortcut menu, choose Match Visibility from Layer Set.
4 Select the Key plan layer set and press OK twice to confirm yoursettings.
Now the 2D floor plan including the main dimension lines butwithout hatching is displayed on screen.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the Shell drawing layer set. Selectthe Set all layers visible in the layer set to modifiable option.
Tip: The design exists twice inthe Shell drawing layer set.You can hide a single floorplan using the visibility statusof layers or the Open on aproject-specific basis dialogbox to .
250 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
Exercise 4: Elevator Pit
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthis module:
3D Modeling
In this exercise, you will design an elevator pit for the basement youhave created in exercise 3.
To do this, you will mainly use the tools in the 3D Modelingmodule. You can select these tools via the Create, Create II andModify flyouts on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Start by selecting fileset 2 with the following drawing files:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
2 101 3D floor plan
201 3D modeling
202 Component modeler
203 Walls, openings, components
204 3D views and sections
205 Bar reinforcement, model on
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 251
Creating the 3D model with the 3D Modeling module
If you have not licensed the 3D Modeling module, use the Walls, Openings, Components module to create the elevator pit
(see page 262).
Tools: Objective:
Box
Surface
3D Line
Polyline Sweep Solid
Move
252 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
Start by making initial settings.
To select a drawing file and to set options
1 In the CAD Navigator select the 3D Modeling module inthe Bonus Tools family.
2 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),open the drawing file tree for fileset 2 by clicking the plus signbeside the name of the fileset and double-click drawing file 201.
3 Check the current scale in the status bar and, if required, set it to1:100. The current length should be set to m.
4 On the Format toolbar, select pen thickness 0.50 mm andlinetype 1.
5 On the Window menu, click 3 Viewports.This way, you will see the design in isometric view, elevation andplan view as you go along.
Start by designing the floor slab using the Box tool.
To draw a box
1 Click Box (Create flyout).
2 In plan view (viewport on the right), click a point of your choicein the workspace. The corner is to be the bottom left point of thebox.
3 Enter the following values in the dialog line:Diagonally opposite point / length = 2.54Point / width = 3.00Point on surface parallel to base of box / height = 0.30
4 On the Window menu, click 3 Viewports again to refresh theview in all the three viewports.
Note: By default, the layerAR_GEN is used with thetools in the 3D Modelingmodule. As we will use thetools in the Shell moduleto edit the design later, thelayer setting is irrelevant atthe moment.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 253
In the next steps, we will create the polyline sweep solid consistingof vertical walls which are joined with the floor slab in the basement.This involves three basic steps:
• Creating the outline as a planar polygonal surface
• Creating the path using 3D lines
• Generating the polyline sweep solid
To create an outline as a planar polygonal surface
1 Click Surface (Create flyout). The following dialog box isdisplayed:
2 Select using new lines and click OK to confirm.
3 In isometric view (viewport at top left), move the crosshairs to thetop front corner of the box. The data entry fields in the dialogline are highlighted in yellow.
3
254 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
4 Enter a value of –0.20 for the X Coordinate and avalue of 0.50 for the Y Coordinate and press ENTER toconfirm.
The crosshairs are now attached to the starting point.
5 Use the Z Coordinate and X Coordinate data entry fieldsin the dialog line to enter the values defining the planarpolygonal surface using the information provided below.
Use the TAB key to switch between the data entry fields.
dZ = 1.10 dX = 0.70 dZ = 0.30 dX = -1.00 dZ = -1.40 dX = 0.30
The design should now look like this in isometric view:
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 255
The next step in this exercise involves drawing the path for thepolyline sweep solid as a 3D line.
To draw the path for a polyline sweep solid as a 3Dline
1 Click 3D Line (Create flyout).
2 In isometric view, click the top left point of the outline (seebelow).
3 Use Y Coordinate and X Coordinate in the dialog line toenter the shaft dimensions:dY = 2.00dX = -1.54dY = -2.00dX = 1.54
2
4 Press ESC twice to quit the tool.
256 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
Now we will create the polyline sweep solid. The 3D line will serve asthe path; in other words, the polygonal surface will be moved(‘swept’) along this line.
To create a polyline sweep solid
1 Click Polyline Sweep Solid (Create flyout).
2 Click path for sweep solid:Select the 3D line. Use the left mouse button to enclose it in aselection window.
3 Click profile for sweep solid:Click the polygonal surface.
2.1
2.2
3
4 The following dialog box appears. Select Yes.The surface is swept along the profile.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 257
Your display should now look like this:
To finish this exercise, we will move the volumetric model so that itis congruent with the 3D plan and that the top level of the elevatorpit and the bottom level of the basement walls are identical.
To move the volumetric model
1 Make drawing file 201 current and open drawing file 101 inreference mode.
2 Your workspace should still be divided up into 3 Viewports.Click Move (Edit flyout).
3 In plan view (viewport on the right), select the entire volumetricmodel.
4 On the Window menu, click 3 Viewports to refresh the viewin all the three viewports.
5 Position the volumetric model so that it is congruent with the 3Dfloor plan and so that the shaft dimensions match.
258 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
6 The Move tool is still active.Select the volumetric model again by double-clicking the rightmouse button and move it by dz = -4.49.This value is based on the absolute height of the basement walls(= -2.79) and the overall height of the elevator pit including thefloor slab (= 1.70).
We will use this elevator pit as a basis for our work with the Shell module. In exercise 6, we will merge it to form one solid
and apply reinforcement using the tools in the BarReinforcement module.
Printing out layouts is covered in “Unit 11: Plot Layout”.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 259
Component modeler
You can use the innovative Component Modeler tool, whichrequires a separate license, to enter engineering components inthree-dimensional space quickly and easily. This tool is providedin the 3D Modeling module.
This tools contains predefined components whose dimensions can becustomized in component-specific dialog boxes. All entries you makeare immediately displayed in a preview or on screen.
A number of tools is provided to assist you when it comes to placingcomponents in the workspace.
In the next exercise, we will create the slab and the walls of theelevator pit using the pocket foundation component provided in theComponent Modeler tool.
To create the slab and the walls of the elevator pitusing the Component Modeler
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),close drawing file 201 and open drawing file 202.
2 Click Component Modeler (Create flyout).
260 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
3 In the Select Component dialog box, choose Pocket foundationtype 2.
4 Enable the Place pocket on foundation axis option.
5 In the section view, click the overall height of the pocketfoundation, enter 1.40 and use the TAB key to go to the nextdata entry field. Enter the dimensions of the component as shownbelow:
6 Press OK to confirm settings you entered.Now a preview of the component is displayed attached to thecrosshairs. Click the bottom left corner of the elevator pit tospecify the drop-in point. The bottom center of the foundationplate serves as the component’s reference point.
7 Enter half the length of the opening in the dialog line:
• X coordinate = 0.77
• Y coordinate = 1.00
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 261
8 Move the cursor to the bottom left wall corner of the elevator pit,right-click in the workspace and select Component dialog onthe shortcut menu.
The component’s dialog box is displayed again so that you canmodify the entries you have made beforehand.
9 Select Enter elevation specs and enter –4.49.
10 Click OK to confirm the dialog box and to place the component.Then press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: When you modifysettings, all changes you makeare displayed directly in theworkspace.
262 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
Creating the 3D model using the Walls, Openings, Components module
As an alternative to the 3D Modeling module, you can also usethe tools in the Walls, Openings, Components module to createthe elevator pit.
You can select these tools via the Create, Create II and Modifyflyouts on the Basic Tools toolbar. As you are already familiar withthese tools, we will not describe them in detail.
Tools: Objective:
Wall
Slab
Slab Recess, Opening
Move
Start by making initial settings.
To select a drawing file and to set options
1 In the CAD Navigator select the Walls, Openings,Components module.
2 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar) anddouble-click drawing file 203.
3 Check the current scale in the status bar and, if required, set it to1:100. The current length should be set to m.
4 On the Format toolbar, select pen thickness 0.50 mm andlinetype 1.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 263
Create the walls of the elevator pit.
To create walls
1 Click Wall (Create flyout).
2 Click Properties.
3 In the Wall dialog box, set the thickness to 0.300, the priorityrating to 300 and the pen to 0.50 mm. Select hatching 7 andclick Height.
4 In the Height dialog box, use absolute values to define the heightsettings:
• Top level: –3.09.
• Bottom level: –4.19.
5 Press OK twice to confirm the settings.
6 Click Rectangular Wall.
7 Start point:In plan view (viewport on the right), click a point of your choicein the workspace.
8 Observe the wall’s offset direction in the preview and make surethat it is towards the outside. If it isn’t change it by clicking
Rotate about axis.
264 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
9 Diagonally opposite point:Enter a value of 1.54 for the X Coordinate and avalue of 2.00 for the Y Coordinate and press ENTER toconfirm.
Now we will create the slab and the floor slab for the elevator pit.
To create the slab and the floor slab
1 Click Slab (Create flyout).
2 Click Properties.
3 In the Slab dialog box, set the priority rating to 300; selecthatching 7 and click the Setup button.
4 In the Height dialog box, use absolute values to define the heightsettings:
• Top level: –2.79
• Bottom level: –3.09
5 Click OK twice.
6 Define properties, place polygon point 1 or enter offset:Enter 0.70 for the offset in the dialog line.
7 In plan view, click the bottom left corner of the wall you havejust created.
8 To point or element / enter offset:In plan view, click the top right corner of the wall you have justcreated.
9 Repeat steps 2 through 8 to enter the floor slab. The overlap tothe wall is 0.20 m. Use the following absolute values to definethe height of the floor slab:
• Top level: –4.19
• Bottom level: –4.49
10 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Manual Unit 4: Floor Plan and Shell Drawing 265
In the next exercise we will insert an opening in the slab.
To create a slab opening
1 Click Slab Recess, Opening (Create flyout).
2 Click the slab at top.
3 On the Slab Recess, Opening Context toolbar,click Properties.
4 Select the Slab opening type, set the shape of outline to free-from, and click OK to confirm.
5 Enable Outline Auto-Detect in the dialog line (icon must bepressed in).
6 Click within the walls. The system automatically detects the area.
7 Press ESC to quit the tool.
8 On the Window menu, click 3 Viewports to refresh the viewin all the three viewports.
9 In the border of the viewport of the isometric view (viewport attop left), click Hidden Line Image an then Regen.
Tip: You can also select theslab in an elevation orisometric view.
266 Exercise 4: Elevator Pit Allplan 2005
To finish, move the elevator pit below the elevator shaft in thebasement you created in exercise 3.
To move the elevator pit
1 Make drawing file 203 current and open drawing file 101 inreference mode.
2 Your workspace should still be divided up into 3 Viewports.Click Move (Edit flyout).
3 In plan view (viewport on the right), select the entire elevator pit.
4 On the Window menu, click 3 Viewports to refresh the viewin all the three viewports.
5 Position the elevator pit so that it is congruent with the 3D floorplan and that the shaft dimensions match.
Manual Unit 5: Key Plan 267
Unit 5: Key PlanThis unit presents basic information on the tools in theKey Plan module. Moreover, you will learn how to createkey plans quickly and easily.
268 Exercise 5: Key Plan for the Basement Allplan 2005
Exercise 5: Key Plan for the Basement
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthis module:
Key Plan
In this exercise, you will create a simple key plan based on the floorplan of the basement. This exercise is based on exercise 3.
To create this key plan, you will mainly use the tools in the Key Plan module. You can select these tools via the Create,
Create II and Modify flyouts on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Start by selecting fileset 1 with the following drawing files:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
1 101 3D plan
102 2D plan
103 2D stairs
104 Dimensions and labels
105 3D hidden line image
110 Key plan
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Manual Unit 5: Key Plan 269
Tools: Objective:
Horizontal Mark
Slab Mark
Move
Modify Lines
Start by making initial settings.
To select drawing files and to set options
1 In the CAD Navigator select the Key Plan module in theEngineering family.
2 Click Open and on a project-specific basis (Standardtoolbar), open the drawing file tree for fileset 1, select drawingfile 110, open drawing files 102 and 103 in edit mode and closeall the others.
3 On the Window menu, click 1 Viewport.
4 Check the current scale in the status bar and, if required, set it to1:100. The current length should be set to m.
5 On the Format toolbar, select pen thickness 0.25 mm andlinetype 1.
6 Click Options (Standard toolbar) and select Key Plan.
Tip: See the section entitled"Key Plan module – Basics" inthe online Help:
270 Exercise 5: Key Plan for the Basement Allplan 2005
7 Enter settings as shown above and click OK to confirm.
As the half-space landing and the flights of the stair will be createdas precast units, we will start by drawing the boundaries of thesecomponents. Next, we will define the visibility of the design entitiesusing layer sets.
To specify the visibility of design entities
1 Click Line (Draft flyout).
2 Click in the Select, Set Layers list box (Format toolbar) and selectSet....
3 Select the List entire layer hierarchy option and click the button at top left to close the tree structure.
Manual Unit 5: Key Plan 271
4 Open the Key plan area of the Engineering layer structure byclicking the relevant plus sign and double-click layer KP_GEN.
5 Draw the missing components and press ESC to quit the tool.
6 Click in the Select, Set Layers list box again and select Set....
7 Click in the layer structure with the right mouse button and, onthe shortcut menu, choose Match Visibility from Layer Set.
8 Select the Key plan layer set and press OK twice to confirm yoursettings.
Now the floor plan including the lines you have just created isdisplayed on screen.
272 Exercise 5: Key Plan for the Basement Allplan 2005
First, we will apply marks to the exterior walls. After this, the slabwill be assigned a mark name.
To create horizontal marks
1 Click Horizontal Mark (Create flyout).Check that the layer KP_POS is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
2 On the Horizontal Mark Context toolbar, click WithoutDirection of Load and select Bubble.
3 Enable Plus Text, Leader and Number +. This defines theappearance of the mark text.
4 Click to make settings for the mark text.
5 Set the parameters as shown above.
6 In the dialog line, enter W01 and press ENTER to confirm.
7 Place the mark bubble displayed attached to the crosshairs on theexterior wall on the left (see illustration below).
8 Reference:Click the exterior wall. A leader appears – this serves as the linkto the component. Press ESC to finish this process.
9 Set a start point, click text or enter additional text:Set the text parameters and click where the additional text is toappear.
Tip: You can specify the typeof leader on the Dynamictoolbar.
Manual Unit 5: Key Plan 273
10 Enter d = 30 for the additional text and press ENTER to confirm.
8
7
9
11 Press ESC. The next number is already displayed attached to thecrosshairs. You can modify it in the dialog line.
12 Label the exterior wall at the bottom W02.
13 Continue like this with the other exterior walls and assign themthe mark numbers W03 and W04.
14 Press ESC twice to quit the tool.
274 Exercise 5: Key Plan for the Basement Allplan 2005
To assign mark numbers to slabs, you can choose between twodifferent display options. The mark name can be written eitherhorizontally or at an angle that reflects the angle of the slabdiagonal. In this exercise, we will use horizontal text.
To create slab marks
1 Click Slab Mark (Create flyout).
2 Click All Sides, set the arrow length to 0.10 and disable theLeader option.
3 In the dialog line, enter 01 and press ENTER to confirm.
4 Start point:Click the bottom left corner of the slab.
5 Diagonal point:Click the top right corner. The mark is displayed.
6 Click where the additional text is to appear.
7 In the additional text in the dialog line and press ENTER toconfirm.
8 Press ESC twice to finish.
Manual Unit 5: Key Plan 275
5
4
If you want to modify the key plan (for example, a mark namedirectly lies above a recess), a number of tools are provided:
This tool modifies the shape of the mark border.
This tool modifies mark text.
This tool modifies lines and their reference.
This tool edits additional text.
This tool changes text settings.
This tool replaces mark text (very useful when copying storiesin which only the number identifying the story needs to bechanged).
276 Exercise 5: Key Plan for the Basement Allplan 2005
In the following exercise we will move the slab mark.
To modify mark text
1 Click Move (Edit flyout).
2 Select the element(s) you want to move:Click the mark name.This selects the additional label with direction arrows and slabdiagonals.
3 From point:Click the center of the circle.
4 To point:Drag the circle on the diagonal to top right.
4
2
3
The slab diagonals have also moved.
5 Click Modify Lines (Modify flyout).
6 Click line to be modified:Click the end point on the lower diagonal.
Manual Unit 5: Key Plan 277
7 To point:Click the bottom left corner.
6
7
8 Repeat this process with the line at the top.
9 Press ESC to quit the tool.
278 Allplan 2005
Complete the key plan as shown below. Do not assign mark numbersto the half-space landing and the flights of the stair as thesecomponents are precast units.
To finish, open drawing file 104 in edit mode. As you have selectedthe Key plan layer set, only the main dimensions are displayed.
Printing out layouts is covered in “Unit 11: Plot Layout”.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 279
Unit 6: ReinforcementDrawing
This unit provides basic information on the modulesproviding tools for creating reinforcement drawings. Infour exercises, you will learn how to efficiently createreinforcement drawings.
� Using the tools in the Shell and Bar Reinforcement modules, you will reinforce the
3D elevator pit and create a reinforcement model atthe same time (first method). Moreover, you are givenan introduction to the tools in the
Reinforcement Schedules module.
� Using the tools in the Bar Reinforcement module,you will reinforce a simple 2D door lintel, create areinforcement model (second method) and save thereinforcement as a symbol.
� Using the tools in the Bar Reinforcement and Mesh Reinforcement modules, you will reinforce a
simple 2D slab without creating a model (thirdmethod).
� Using the tools in the BAMTEC module, you willreinforce a section of a slab.
To finish, you will learn how to manage Cross-Section Catalogs.
280 Overview of Exercises Allplan 2005
Overview of Exercises
Exercise 6: 3D elevator pit with model (first method)
You will reinforce the elevator pit you created in exercise 4.To do this, you will use the tools in the Shell and Bar Reinforcementmodules with the reinforcement model being enabled.
Floor slab t = 30 cm Shaft walls t = 30 cm
Typical section
horiz. corner reinf.
Section A-A Section B-B
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 281
Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method)
You will draw a door lintel with the tools in the Draft module andreinforce it using the tools in the Bar Reinforcement module (withthe reinforcement module being enabled).
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
You will save the door lintel as a symbol in a catalog, retrieve andmodify it.
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
282 Overview of Exercises Allplan 2005
Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method)
You will reinforce sections of the slab you created in exercise3.To do this, you will use the tools in the Mesh Reinforcement andBar Reinforcement modules with the reinforcement model beingdisabled.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 283
Exercise 9: BAMTEC® reinforcement
You will reinforce a section of the slab using the tools in theBAMTEC module with the reinforcement model being disabled.
This bar is displayed in red (end of carpet)
284 Initial Settings Allplan 2005
Initial SettingsIn unit 2, you floated the Dynamic toolbar and selected theEngineering Configuration. In addition, make the following settings:
• In the CAD Navigator select the Shell module in theEngineering family. The Basic Tools toolbar should now look likethis:
Draft flyout
Text flyout
Dim. Lines flyout
Plan flyout
Edit flyout
Basi
c to
ols
(alw
ays
avai
labl
e)
CAD Navigator
Create flyout
Create II flyout
Modify flyout Shel
l Mod
ule
• As the engineering configuration is enabled, the Engineeringtoolbar is visible:
Model flyout
Enter Bending Shape and Placement flyout
Area Reinforcement flyout
Area Reinforcement (Mesh) flyout
BAMTEC flyout
Display flyout
Modify flyout
Lists/Schedules flyout
Tip: The step-by-stepinstructions make extensivereference to flyouts and theicons they contain.If you are a novice, westrongly recommend that youmake a copy of this and stickit on your screen!
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 285
Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (FirstMethod)
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthe following modules:
Shell Bar Reinforcement
Check the Engineering toolbar to see whether the following toolsare available:
Reinforce with Model on/off FF Reinforcement
In this exercise you will reinforce the 3D elevator pit you havedesigned in exercise 4. First, you will create all necessary views andsections using the Shell module. Next, you will create thereinforcement with the model being enabled (first method). Pleasenote that this exercises requires exercises 3 and 4!
Start by selecting fileset 2 with the following drawing files:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
2 101 3D floor plan
201 3D modeling
202 Component modeler
203 Walls, openings, components
204 3D views and sections
205 Bar reinforcement, model on
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Tip: See the section entitled"Reinforcement Methods" inthe online Help:
286 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Floor slab t = 30 cm Shaft walls t = 30 cm
Typical section
horiz. corner reinf.
Section A-A Section B-B
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 287
Shell entities / views and sections
In the first part of the exercise, you will transfer (use) the 3D elevatorpit you created earlier to shell view and create views and sectionswhich will form the basis for the reinforcement (see ‘Tip’ on the left).
To do this, you will use the tools in the Shell module. You canselect these tools via the module-specific flyouts (Create, Create IIand Modify) on the Basic Tools toolbar.
Tools: Objective:
Use for Shell
Section
Convert View to Section
Delete Clipping Path
Label View
You can use the tools in the Shell module to create clippingpaths and views. These form the basis for the reinforcementdrawing later.
At first glance, views and sections would appear to be notdifferent from 2D data. However, they are derived from a three-dimensional model and are therefore inherently linked.
Placing reinforcement or making modifications in a view orsection has an immediate and direct effect on the three-dimensional model and consequently on all the other views andsections.
Due to this three-dimensional association, views and sectionshave to be modified using the module-specific edit tools.
Tip: See the section entitled"Shell module – Basics" in theonline Help:
288 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
To create reinforcement, at least two orthogonal views orsections are required. You can create any number of additionalsections by deriving them from the three-dimensional model. Thereinforcement is automatically displayed in the appropriatemanner.Sections are different to views in that they have a spatiallydelimited depth. This delimitation is defined using two clippinglines.
Start by making initial settings.
To select drawing files and to set options
1 In the CAD Navigator, select the Shell module in theEngineering family.
2 Click Open and on a project-specific basis (Standardtoolbar), open the drawing file tree for fileset 2, select drawingfile 204, open drawing files 101 and 102 (or 103) in edit modeand close all the others.
3 On the Window menu, click 1 Viewport.
4 In the status bar, click the current Scale and select 1:50; click thecurrent Length and select m.
5 Click Options (Standard toolbar) and select Shell.
6 Switch to the Tools tab and in the Section/view border area, setthe Shape option from Off to Box or Fill.
7 On the Format menu, click Select, Set Layers, select the Listexisting layers in open drawing files option and click the button at top left to open the tree structure.
8 Select the layers AR_GEN and AR_WALL, click the selection withthe right mouse button and, on the shortcut menu, chooseModifiable.
Tip: You can specify howviews and sections aredisplayed in the Optionsfor the Shell module. Detailedinformation is provided inAllplan’s online Help system.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 289
First, we will transfer the 3D elevator pit to shell view.
When you ‘transfer’ elements (as opposed to ‘converting’ them),the original drawing file data is retained. You can set transferparameters (e.g. pen, line and color) in the Options for the
Shell module.
To transfer 3D elements to shell view
1 Click Use for Shell (Create flyout).The system proposes the layer SH_GEN.
2 Click in the Select, Set Layers list box (Format toolbar) and selectSet....
3 Select the List layers assigned to currently selected menu optionand double-click the layer SH_SHELL.
4 Select the elements to be used for the shell:Press and hold the left mouse button, work from right to left andenclose the elevator pit’s upper floor slab (see below) in aselection rectangle. This selects the elements fully bounded andintersected by the selection rectangle ( Select elements indirection-dependent manner is enabled in the Filter Assistant).
Tip: You can also transfer 3Delements to shell view usingthe Shell module. Note,however, that this will destroythe original data. You shouldtherefore make a copy first.
290 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
4.2
4.1
Note:Alternatively, you can select in the Filter Assistant and definethe selection window independently of the direction.
5 When prompted whether the solids are to be joined, choose Yesby entering Y in the dialog line. Then press enter or click theequivalent icon on the Dynamic toolbar.
6 Press ESC to quit the tool.The 3D elements are transferred as a shell view. The lines (pen,linetype, color) are displayed according to the settings you havemade in Options of the Shell module.
7 Close drawing files 101 and 201 (or 203).
Tip: You can modify thedisplay of lines later using the
Modify Format Propertiestool.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 291
Using the shell view, we will now create a longitudinal andtransverse section required for the reinforcement drawing.
To create sections
1 Right-click a line of the shell view you have just created andselect Section on the shortcut menu.
2 Select a view/section from which to create a section:Click anywhere in the floor plan. A circle will appear at thecenter, and the crosshairs will be displayed as attached to thecircle.
3 On the Section Context toolbar, you can switch the referencemode by clicking Observer and/or Folded. Set it to Observer.
4 Set viewing direction:Click below the circle. The effect of this is that the shell objectwill be viewed from the front when the section is calculated.
Before you define the clipping area, you can control how theclipping path and the section itself are displayed.To do this, click Show Clipping Path on the Section Contexttoolbar.
Tip: In Observer referencemode, the lower shell edge isalways placed horizontally; inother words, horizontal edgesremain horizontal, regardlesswhich side they are viewedfrom.In Folded reference mode,however, the section createdis simply folded.
292 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
The following options are provided in the Section dialog box:
• You can configure the system to display the clipping path:enable the Place clipping line and Place direction symboloptions and set parameters.
• You can specify the overlap of boundary lines and defineformat properties.
• You can select a hatching, pattern or fill.
For this exercise, we will not make additional settings in thisdialog box.
5 Enter points to define the section:Define a rectangular section that passes through the door opening(see the illustration below) and press ESC to finish entering thepolyline.
6 Place the section in the workspace or enter a rotation anglePlace the section below and aligned with the plan.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 293
7 Enter more points to define another section:The entire height of the wall is displayed in the section. However,only the wall junction is relevant for the reinforcement drawing.Define the section again (the upper boundary should be about50 cm above the floor slab).
2
4
5
5
6
7
7
1
8 The Section tool should still be active. Click in the floor planagain and create the longitudinal section (viewed from the right).
9 Place the section to the right of the transverse section.
10 Enter more points to define another section:Adjust the height of the section area by clicking diagonallyopposite points in the boundary of the transverse section. Thenpress ESC.
294 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
8
8
9
10
10
11 Press ESC to quit the tool.
You can configure the program to automatically dimensionviews and sections when they are created. All you need to do isopen the Options for the Shell module, enable the maintoggle in the Automation tab and set general defaults in theViews and Sections area. You can then enable/disable thedimensioning of views and sections on the Dynamic toolbarwhile you are creating them.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 295
In the next step we will convert the shell view to a section. Theclipping area will be defined so that only the lower floor slab and thepit walls are displayed.
To convert a view to a section
1 Right-click a line of the shell view again and select ConvertView to Section on the shortcut menu.
2 Enter points to define the section:Click the bottom left boundary point in the transverse section anda point above and to the right of the floor slab and press ESC.
3 Enter more points to define another section:Click the bottom left boundary point in the longitudinal sectionand a point above and to the right of the floor slab and pressESC.
2 3
2 3
4 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: When you click a sectionwith the right mouse button,the Convert Section toView tool is presented on theshortcut menu instead of the
Convert View to Sectiontool.
296 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Finally, we will create another section that will display both the pitwalls and the adjoining walls in the basement.The final position and extents of the section will be defined later.
To create another section
1 Double click a line of any section of your choice with the rightmouse button.
2 Select a view/section from which to create a section:Click the transverse section and set the viewing direction fromabove.
3 Enter points to define the section:In the transverse section, click a point on the left just below theupper floor slab and on the right just above the upper floor slaband press ESC.
4 On the Create Section Context toolbar, click Fix and place thesection as you want in the workspace.
5 Set the transport point to the inside left corner of the shaft andplace the section to the right of and aligned with the floor plan.
3
5
3
6 Press ESC twice to quit the tool.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 297
7 If the clipping paths of the sections created are displayed, clickany line with the right mouse button, select Delete ClippingPath on the shortcut menu and delete all the clipping paths.
8 Right-click a line of your choice, select Label View on theshortcut menu and label the sections as shown below.
Section B-BSection A-A
Floor slab (plan view) t=30cm Shaft walls (plan view) t=30cm
Views and sections have to be modified using the module-specific edit tools: move, copy, rotate and delete. You can deleteand create views and sections whenever required. One view orsection in the drawing file is sufficient.
298 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Edge reinforcement of the floor slab
In the following exercise you will place bar reinforcement with themodel being enabled (first method: see “Tip” on the left).
To do this, you will use the tools in the Bar Reinforcementmodule. Use the flyouts on the Engineering toolbar and the shortcutmenu to access these tools.
We will start by creating the edge reinforcement of the floor slab:
• We will enter the longitudinal reinforcement manually using the Enter tool.
• We will enter the transverse reinforcement automatically usingthe FF Reinforcement tool.
Tools: Objective:
Reinforce with Model on
Enter: Custom Bar
Place: Edge-based
Mirror and Copy
Label
Dimension Line/Label
FF Reinforcement:
Open Stirrup
Modify PlacementDisplay Mode
Tip: Detailed information isprovided in the “Reinforcewith or without model?”chapter in the online Help.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 299
Start by making initial settings.
To select drawing files and to set options
1 On the View menu, click Default Configurations and selectEngineering Configuration (if you have not already done so).
2 In the CAD Navigator select the Bar Reinforcementmodule in the Engineering family.
3 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),make drawing file 205 current, open drawing file 204 in editmode and close all the others.
4 Check the current scale in the status bar and, if required, set it to1:50. The current unit of length should be set to m.
Before you begin placing reinforcement, you need to specify whichworking mode you want to use (see “Tip” on page 300).
In this exercise, we will work with the reinforcement model beingenabled (first method). This means that the placed reinforcement willbe managed internally by the system and displayed in all the viewsand sections you created in the Shell module.
The floor slab is 30 cm thick. We will create two-way barreinforcement: Ø12/10 cm in the top layer and Ø10/10 cm in thebottom layer. The concrete cover is 4 cm.
The system proposes the layer BR_GEN. As, in this exercise, we donot need to differentiate between the bottom and top reinforcementlayers, we will retain this layer.
In exercise 8, we will arrange the slab reinforcement on severallayers.
Tip: You can specify how barreinforcement is displayed inthe Options for the BarReinforcement module.Detailed information isprovided in Allplan’s onlineHelp system.
300 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
We will start by entering the bending shape of the open stirrupmanually.
To enter a custom bar manually
1 Click Reinforce with Model on/off (Model flyout) to activatethe model (the icon is pressed in).
2 Click Enter (Create flyout).Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
3 You can select a bending shape. As the open stirrup (U-shapedbar) is not amongst those provided, you need to ‘form’ it yourself.Click Custom Bar.
4 On the Enter Context toolbar, click Concrete Cover All Sidesat bottom left and enter 0.04. This creates a concrete cover on allsides with a thickness of 4 cm. Set all the other values as shownabove.
5 To enter the U-shaped bar, click the points as shown below. Youcan define the leg length in the next step.
Tip: You can use the FF Reinforcement tool to
place open stirrupsautomatically. You will learnhow to do this later.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 301
1st point 2nd point
3rd point4th point
6 Press ESC to finish entering the U-shaped bar.
7 Click point for first segment or enter external dimension:Enter 0.80.
8 Click point for last segment or enter external dimension:Enter 0.80.
9 Make settings for the mark text in the dialog box that appears.
Click Toggle and select font number 8.
10 Place the mark number.
10
11 This defines the bending shape. After definition, the programautomatically proceeds to the placement operation. You can pressESC to quit the tool and place the mark later using the Placetool.In this exercise we will continue and place the mark.
302 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
To place the open stirrup in an edge-based manner
1 The dialog box shown below is open.If it isn’t, click the U-shaped bar to be placed with the rightmouse button and, on the shortcut menu, choose Place.
2 Select Edge-Based and click OK to confirm.
3 Click the edges of the shell to define the placing area.1st point of placing line:In plan view, click the point at bottom right.2nd point of placing line:Click the point at top right (see illustration).
3.2
3.1
The placing area is displayed with dashed lines.
Tip: In the preview, theplacement is displayedtogether with the entries youmake. This way, you can checkthe settings you make as yougo along.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 303
On the Place Context toolbar, you can modify the position of thebar and the concrete cover for the placement.
4 Click Align, leave the setting for the concrete cover as it is andconfirm.Align uses the spatial orientation and position of the identifiedmark and places the reinforcement in alignment (see “Tip” on theleft).
Another dialog box appears:
5 Select From Middle Outwards and Show Middle BarOnly. Click the Add Number button and select 30. Set the otherparameters as shown above and click OK to confirm.
The system will prompt for another placement. Press ESC.Another dialog box appears. Use it to configure how thedimension line is to be displayed.
Tip: Detailed information isprovided in the “Placingmode: align / move / rotate”chapter in the online help.
Tip: When you want to placemore bars, you can do thisimmediately after havingcreated the first placement.
304 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
6 Click Dimension Line, then and select the layerRU_ALL and font 8. Change the aspect ratio to 1.00.
7 Click OK to confirm the dialog boxes and place a point throughwhich the dimension line is to pass.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 305
In the dialog box that appears, you can specify the contents ofthe label for the placement:
8 Set the parameters as shown above, click Toggle, select fontnumber 8 and place the label.
7
8
9 Press ESC to quit the tool.
You can choose between the following display modes:
all the bars are displayed.
only the bar in the middle is displayed.
you can select the bars to be displayed.
a single bar is displayed as folded. The program presentsvarious folding directions for selection.
You can make modifications later using the ModifyPlacement Display Mode tool.
306 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
You can place labels immediately or later. The following toolsare provided for applying labels at a later stage:
Label Dimension Line/Label.
Placed reinforcement is displayed in all the views and sections.But during creation, it can only be labeled in the placing view. Ifyou want to place labels in other views and sections, too, youneed to do this later.
Instead of placing the bar again on the opposite side, we will mirrormark 1. Then we will apply a label.
To mirror and copy reinforcement
1 Click Mirror and Copy (Edit flyout).
2 Click the bar in the section.
3 Define the mirror axis:1st point of mirror axis:Right-click a horizontal line of the floor slab (see below),select Midpoint on the shortcut menu and press ENTER toconfirm the values in the dialog line.2nd point of mirror axis:Enter a value that is not equal to 0 for the Y Coordinate inthe dialog line and press ENTER to confirm.
4 Press ESC to quit the tool.
5 Right-click the bar in the section and select Label on theshortcut menu.
6 Position the mark number where you want and press ESC to quitthe tool.
Tip: To activate general edittools, you can also click in theworkspace with the rightmouse button and select atool on the shortcut menu.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 307
3 256
7 As the sections are inherently linked, the placement you have justmirrored is also displayed in plan view. Right-click the bar inplan view and select Dimension Line/Label on the shortcutmenu to label the placement.
8 Place the dimension line and the text to the left of the plan andpress ESC to quit the tool.
7
8
308 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Alternatively, we will now place the transverse edge reinforcementautomatically using the FF Reinforcement tool.
To enter and automatically place reinforcement usingFF Reinforcement
1 Double-click the U-shaped bar you have just created with theright mouse button.
The FF Reinforcement tool opens.
2 You can use the FF Reinforcement tool to create reinforcing barsas well as meshes. However, the RU_ALL layer is assigned to thistool by default.Check the layer and, if necessary, click Select, Set Layers (Formattoolbar) and activate the RU_ALL layer.
3 Set the Diameter to 12 and select Enter bending shape.
4 In the Select Bending Shape dialog box, click Open stirrupwith corrugated legs.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 309
5 In the Define Position of Bending Shape dialog box, set the leglength to 0.800 and enable the Enter concrete coverseparately check box.
6 In section B-B, move the cursor over the bottom right edge of thefloor slab. When the stirrup expands automatically to adjust tothe correct position, click with the left mouse button.
6
7 In the Concrete cover on segment dialog box, enter the concretecover of the stirrup’s side which is displayed in the selectioncolor. To get to the next side, click Next and enter the concretecover.As these bars are in the second layer, enter 0.055 for the concretecover of the horizontal legs. For the vertical legs, the systemproposes a value of 0.040. Accept it.
310 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
8 In the 3D Placement dialog box, enable the Label reinforcementoption and click Place automatically.
9 Place the label.
10 Click Mirror and Copy (Edit flyout) and select thereinforcement you have just created as an entity group in plan.
11 1st point of mirror axis:Right-click a vertical line of the floor slab in plan,select Midpoint on the shortcut menu and press ENTER toconfirm the values in the dialog line.
12 2nd point of mirror axis:Enter a value that is not equal to 0 for the X Coordinate inthe dialog line and press ENTER to confirm. Press ESC.
13 Right-click the placement in plan, select Modify PlacementDisplay Mode on the shortcut menu and activate ShowMiddle Bar Only.
14 Use the Label and Dimension Line/Label tools to label thereinforcement you have just mirrored.
Tip: When you click Place manually,
the Place tool is activatedautomatically. This approachwas described with thelongitudinal reinforcement.
Tip: You can also mirror thelabel and the dimension lineby selecting them with thereinforcement.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 311
Section A-A Section B-B
Floor slab t=30cm Shaft walls t=30 cm
312 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Area reinforcement of the floor slab
The edge reinforcement of the floor slab has been placed. Thefollowing part of the exercise involves creating area reinforcement.
Tools: Objective:
Enter AreaReinforcement
Span Reinforcement
New Mark Number
Modify Mark
Modify PlacementDisplay Mode
We will start by creating the two-way bar reinforcement.
To create the bottom layer as span reinforcement
1 Click Span Reinforcement (Area Reinforcement flyout).
2 Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
3 In which view?Click the floor slab displayed in plan. This defines the spatialorientation for the placement.
Tip: Alternatively, you canalso click Enter AreaReinforcement in the Createflyout and select SpanReinforcement on theContext toolbar:
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 313
4 Click the bottom left corner in plan.
5 To point or element / enter offset:In the dialog line, enter –0.04 for the support depth.By entering a negative value, the placing polygon is movedtowards the interior.
6 Click the top right corner of the plan.
3
6
4
7 Press ESC to finish. This selects the area.
8 Define the layer depth. In the Enter Area Reinforcement dialogbox, click in the Layer Depth data entry box.
314 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
9 Layer in reference view:Click the point at bottom left in section B-B.
9
The dashed line represents the current layer depth of thereinforcement taking the concrete cover into account. Theelevation mark represents the layer depth of the definition pointentered. The arrow indicates the direction of the positive bar legand the placing direction of the bar.
10 In the same dialog box, click Concrete Cover (Bottom) andenter 0.04. Notice how the dashed line moved in section B-B.
11 Click OK to confirm your entries.
12 Set the placing parameters on the Enter Area ReinforcementContext toolbar:Diameter 10,Spacing 0.10,Angle 0.00,Equal Offsets to Edge .At bottom right, set the placement to PP (= place in polygon).For the placement display mode, set Show Selected Bars asthe bars are congruent with the U-shaped bars in plan view andwill hide them otherwise.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 315
13 Press OK to confirm.
14 Select the bar you want to display:In the preview, all the bars are displayed in the selection color.Click a bar in the upper third and press ESC.
15 Enable the Mark Intersected Bars option and place the dimensionline.
16 Click Custom Text, enter bottom and place the label.
17 Next, we will place the transverse reinforcement. You do not needto enter the shell polygon again; you can copy the one we haveused for the longitudinal reinforcement. On the Dynamic toolbar,click Copy.
18 Select the shell polygon you want to use:Click the existing polygon.
19 The system will automatically propose 0.050 for the concretecover at bottom. Increase this value to 0.055 (this is to take thebar ribs into account) and click OK to confirm.
20 The system will automatically propose an placing angle of 90degrees. Check the settings and click OK to confirm.
21 Select a bar, place the dimension line and the label containing thecustom text “bottom”.
316 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
The bottom layer should now look like this:
Now that you have finished the bottom layer, you should be able tocreate the bars for the top layer yourself. The following section has a"rough design guideline" - tools that you have already encounteredare no longer explained in detail.
To create the top layer as span reinforcement
1 The Span Reinforcement tool is still active. If it isn’t, select itnow.
2 Use the existing shell polygon.
3 To define the layer depth, click the top left point in the floor slabin section B-B.
4 Click the Concrete Cover (Top) data entry box and enter 0.04.
5 Confirm the settings and set the placing angle to 0.00 degrees.
6 Change the diameter to 12 in the dialog line and confirm.
7 Select a bar, place the dimension line and the label containing thecustom text “top”.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 317
8 Proceed as usual with the second layer in the reinforcement at thetop. After you have copied the shell polygon, bear in mind thatyou have to set the reference for the layer depth to the top leveland click Concrete Cover (Top) again. Set the diameter to 12once again.
The floor slab should now look like this:
Instead of creating the top layer from scratch, you can mirror andcopy the bottom reinforcement (including the dimension line andlabel).
As the diameter of the top bars is set to 12 mm, the bars ofreinforcement you just mirrored need to be assigned a new marknumber using the New Mark Number tool (Modify flyout).
Then you can change the diameter using the Modify Mark tooland you can select the bars to be displayed and label the placementwith Modify Placement Display Mode.
318 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Starter bars
The reinforcement for the floor slab is complete. We now need toreinforce the walls. To do this, we will begin by placing the starterbars.
Tools: Objective:
FF Reinforcement:
Open Stirrup
Stirrup
Modify PlacementDisplay Mode
Place: Edge-based
Dimension Line/Label
To enter and place starter bars using FF Reinforcement
1 Double-click a U-shaped bar with the right mouse button.
The FF Reinforcement tool opens.Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
2 Set the Diameter to 12 and select Enter bending shape.
3 In the Select Bending Shape dialog box, click Open stirrupwith corrugated legs.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 319
4 In the Define Position of Bending Shape dialog box, set the leglength to 1.000 and disable the Enter concrete coverseparately check box.
5 In section A-A, move the cursor over the left exterior edge of thewall. When the stirrup expands automatically to adjust to thecorrect position, click with the left mouse button.
5
6 In the plan of the floor slab, right-click the top left point of theexterior edge of the wall and select Placement depth from on theshortcut menu.
7 Right-click the endpoint at bottom left on the exterior edge of thewall and select Placement depth to on the shortcut menu.The placing area is reduced accordingly.
8 In the 3D Placement dialog box, click Placeautomatically
9 Disable the custom text by clicking the data entry box andactivating the button in the dialog box.
10 Place the label in the section view, disable the Mark IntersectedBars option in the dimension line settings, place the label in planview and press ESC to quit the tool.
320 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
11 Right-click the placement in plan, select Modify PlacementDisplay Mode on the shortcut menu, set the display mode to Show Selected Bars, click the three bars below the center andpress ESC twice.
The floor slab should now look like this in plan:
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 321
Now we will place mark 7 in more walls.
There is a door opening in the wall on the right in the basement. Wewill insert closed stirrups here. Consequently, we will only placemark 7 in the other area of the wall. We will define the placing areain the view where the shaft walls are displayed in plan. The placedbars, however, will only be displayed in the view where the floor slabis displayed in plan as the starter bars are not located in the clippingarea of the shaft walls.
To place starter bars using the Rotated option
1 Click Place and confirm the value proposed by the system inthe dialog line: mark 7.
2 Select Edge-Based.
3 Place mark 7 in the lower transverse wall (from left to right). Todefine the endpoints of the placing line, use the points where theinterior walls and the exterior edge of the bottom wall intersect(use Point of Intersection on the shortcut menu of theAdvanced point entry to assist you).
3 3
322 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
4 Click Rotated, set the Placing Angle to 90 degrees and confirmyour settings. The preview of the bending shape rotates.
5 Confirm the next dialog box, select the bars to be displayed andpress ESC twice.
6 Place the dimension line and the label and press ESC to quit thetool.
7 Use the Mirror and Copy tool to copy the bars you have justplaced to the upper transverse wall. Do not forget to copy thelabel, too. (Alternative: continue and place reinforcement in thetransverse wall at the top. Set the Placing Angle to –90 degrees.)
8 Click Place again and confirm the mark proposed by thesystem in the dialog line: mark 7.
9 Select Edge-Based.
10 1st point of placing line:In the view where the shaft walls are displayed in plan, click thebottom right outside corner of the 30 cm shaft wall.
11 2nd point of placing line:Click the point where the door reveal (at bottom) and the 30 cmshaft wall intersect.This selects the placing area in the wall on the left.
Tip: The sequence in whichpoints are entered isirrelevant in an ‘aligned’placement. However, with‘moved’ or ‘rotated’placements, it is this verysequence that defines thedirection of the placing area.
Detailed information isprovided in the “Placingmode: align / move / rotate”chapter in the online Help.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 323
11
10
12 Click Rotated, set the Placing Angle to 180 degrees and confirmyour entry. The preview of the bending shape rotates.
13 Confirm the next dialog box, too. As the starter bars are notlocated in the clipping area of the shaft walls, all the bars aredisplayed in the view in which the floor slab is displayed inplan – regardless of the display mode you select.
14 Press ESC to finish placing reinforcement.
15 Use the same approach to place reinforcement above the dooropening. Use the points where the upper door reveal and the 30cm shaft wall intersect as well as the top right outside corner ofthe 30 cm shaft wall.
16 In the plan view of the floor slab, right-click a bar you have justcreated, select Modify Placement Display Mode on theshortcut menu and set the display mode to Show Middle BarOnly.
17 The display of the reinforcement clicked changes. Now click thesecond placement.
18 Apply labels using the Dimension Line/Label tool on theshortcut menu.
324 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
We will now create and place a closed stirrup in the wall near thedoor opening.
To create and automatically place a closed stirrupusing FF Reinforcement
1 Double-click a U-shaped bar with the right mouse button.
The FF Reinforcement tool opens.Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
2 Set the Diameter to 12 and select Enter bending shape.
3 In the Catalog shapes area of the Select Bending Shape dialogbox, click Stirrup (green expansion shape).
4 In section A-A, move the cursor over the left exterior edge of thewall on the right. When the stirrup expands automatically toadjust to the correct position, click with the left mouse button.
84
5 In the plan of the shaft walls, right-click a corner of the upperdoor reveal and select Placement depth from on the shortcutmenu.
6 Right-click a corner of the lower door reveal and selectPlacement depth to on the shortcut menu.The placing area is reduced accordingly.
7 In the 3D Placement dialog box, click Placeautomatically
Tip: You can also enterstirrups manually using the
Enter tool (see exercise 7)
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 325
8 Place the label in the section and in the plan views and press ESCto quit the tool.
9 On the Repeat menu, click Modify Placement Display Modeand click the placement in the plan of the floor slab.
Only the bar in the middle is displayed as you have alreadyselected Show Middle Bar Only in the previous exercise.
10 Press ESC to quit the tool.
This completes the starter bars for the vertical walls.
Floor slab t=30cm
326 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Wall reinforcement
The following part of the exercise involves reinforcing the verticalwalls as far as the top level of the floor slab (TL = -2.79). We willenter the reinforcement in the floor plan of the shaft walls.
Tools: Objective:
Enter:
Custom Bar
Straight Bar
Place:
Edge-based
Define Batch
Show Clipping Path
Stretch Entities
Delete Clipping Path
Section A-A
For the exterior wall reinforcement, we need to design a cranked bar.We will create it manually using the Custom Bar bending shape.Alternatively, you can also use the non-standard bar shape of the
FF Reinforcement tool.
To enter and place cranked bars manually
1 Right-click an existing starter bar in a view of your choice andselect Enter on the shortcut menu.Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
2 Select Custom Bar.
3 Enter 0.00 for the Concrete Cover (Start) and the same value forthe Concrete Cover (End).
4 In section B-B, click the outside corners of the wall on the left.Start at the top.
Tip: For complex bendingshapes, e.g. bent bars for silos,towers etc., you can alsoconvert lines to bars. To dothis, enter the bending shapeusing the tools in the
Draft module and convertit using .During conversion, the designentities are interpreted asbeing the center of the bar.Please keep this in mind whenyou draw the 2D entities.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 327
5 Press ESC.Click point for 1st segment or enter external dimension:Enter 0.95.Click point for last segment or enter external dimension:Enter 1.10.
6 Place the mark number.
1st point
4th point
2ndpoint
3rdpoint
7 Select Edge-Based.
8 In the view where the shaft walls are displayed in plan, click thebottom left outside corner of the 30 cm shaft wall to define the1st point of the placing line.
9 Click the bottom right outside corner of the 30 cm shaft wall todefine the 2nd point of the placing line.
10 The Align option is already selected in the next dialog box. Enter0.10 in the Concrete Cover All Sides data entry box and click OKto confirm your entries.
11 Select Show All Bars, confirm your settings and press ESC.
12 Place the dimension line and the label. The floor plan of the shaftwalls should now look like this:
328 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
13 Now continue on your own and place this mark in the floor planof the shaft walls (not in the area near the door!) and applylabels. Bear in mind that the concrete cover near the door revealsneeds to be changed from 0.10 to 0.04.Select the Rotated option for the placement and set the placingangle to 90 degrees (on the right), 180 degrees (at the top) and270 degrees (in the left).
14 To make sure that the wall reinforcement, which projects beyondthe clipping area of the shell, is displayed in its entirety,click Modify Offset (Edit flyout) and modify the upper sectionborders of the reinforcement in the two sections (height aboveupper floor slab: 1.0 m).
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 329
To complete the vertical reinforcement for the walls, we will createand place a straight bar. In addition, we will insert a L-bar as tensionreinforcement in the top floor slab.
To enter the straight bar and L-bar manually and toplace them in batch mode
1 On the Repeat menu, click Enter.Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
2 Click Straight Bar.
3 Enter 0.00 for the Concrete Cover (Start) and the same value forthe Concrete Cover (End). The Concrete Cover for the Bar is setto 0.04.
4 In section B-B, click the left inside edge of the shaft wall (seefigure) to define the starting point.
5 In the dialog line, enter 0.00 for the X Coordinate and value2.40 for the Y Coordinate and press ENTER to confirm.
6 This creates the bar. It is assigned the mark number 10. Place it.
7 Press ESC to finish.
8 Click Enter again and select Custom Bar.
9 In section B-B, click the left inside edge of the shaft wall againto define the starting point.
10 For the next points, click where the inside edge of the shaft walland the top level of the upper floor slab intersect and the top leftendpoint of the floor slab.
11 Press ESC and enter 1.00 for the length of the legs.
12 Place the mark number and press ESC.
330 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
1010
4,9
13 Right-click one of the bars you have just created andselect Define Batch on the shortcut menu.
14 Select bars for the batch:Select marks 10 and 11 using the Brackets (Filter Assistanttoolbar).
15 Click mark 10 with the right mouse button and select Place onthe shortcut menu.
16 Click Batch Mode and press OK to confirm.
17 In the floor plan of the shaft walls., place the mark on the insideedge of the walls and work in a clockwise direction.For the transverse walls, set the Concrete Cover (Start) and (End)to 0.00 and for the longitudinal walls, set it to 0.04. Enter 0.015for the spacing between the bars.
18 Apply labels as shown below.Using the same approach, continue with the wall on the right (butskip labeling).
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 331
19 L-bars are required in the area near the door. Delete (Editflyout) the interior straight bars (mark 10).When Select elements in a direction-dependent manner isenabled, open the selection rectangle from left to right.Or:Activate the Select elements fully bounded by selectionrectangle only option in the Filter Assistant.
20 Right-click a L-bar, select Modify Placement Display Modeon the shortcut menu and click Show Middle Bar Only on theDynamic toolbar.
21 Click all the L-bars and press ESC.
22 Open the shortcut menu, choose Dimension Line/Label andapply labels to marks 10 and 11 (in the wall on the right).
Tip: When you click Customon the Dynamic toolbar afteryou have defined the firstplacement, you can continueand enter the next placingregion along any placing line(in this exercise, the wall onthe left, for example). Thenyou can create labels anddimensions for all placements.Enable the Add Numberoptions for the individualdimension lines.
332 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
The floor plan of the floor slab also contains marks 9 and 10. Wewant to hide the wall reinforcement here.
To hide reinforcement
1 On the Repeat menu, click Modify Placement Display Mode.
2 On the Dynamic toolbar, click Hidden.
3 In the floor plan of the floor slab, click all the bars of the wallreinforcement you want to hide.
Tip: To make hiddenplacements visible again, useReinforcement Tools.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 333
In the next steps, we will create the horizontal reinforcement usingstraight bars. We will enter these bars in the floor plan of the shaftwalls and place them in the sections.
To create and place horizontal bars
1 In the floor plan of the shaft walls, click a mark (10, for example)and on the shortcut menu, choose Enter.Then click Straight Bar.
2 Enter 0.00 for Concrete Cover All Sides andset the Concrete for Bar value to 0.055 as the bar is to be insidethe vertical reinforcement.
3 Working from top to bottom, click the inside corners of the shaftwall on the right in the view with the shaft walls in plan. Thebar is displayed in the preview. Place the label.
3
3
334 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
4 The bar created can be placed immediately.Select Edge-Based.
5 In section A-A, place the horizontal bars from top to bottom (seefigure).
6 Enter 0.055 for Concrete Cover (Start) and confirm.
7 Confirm the next settings, too, and press ESC.
8 Select a different dimension line for the label of mark 12. On theEnter Context toolbar, click Dimension Line Type.
9 Select a dimension line type and confirm your setting.
10 Click the button with the leader and set it to Man (as shownabove).
11 Place the mark text.
12 Click all the bars to which the leader is to point.
13 Press ESC twice to quit the tool.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 335
5
5
14 Now you can place mark 12 along the other vertical bars or youcan mirror and copy the placement:
15 Now continue with the horizontal reinforcement for thetransverse side as described above. Do not forget to hide thetransverse reinforcement in the floor plan of the floor slab.
Tip: If you consider thespacing between the markborder and label to be toolarge, select the BarReinforcement Options ,switch to the Label Optionstab and change the settingfor the spaces after the markborder.
336 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Next, we will complete the labels in the sections and floor plans.Start with section A-A.
To apply labels later
1 In section A-A, click mark 3 (lower longitudinal reinforcement inthe floor slab) with the right mouse button and select Label onthe shortcut menu.
2 Select Start with Mark and Aut, enable Diameter andSpacing and place the label.
3 Click mark 5, confirm the settings and place the label. Press ESC.
4 Click mark 4 with the right mouse button andselect Dimension Line/Label on the shortcut menu.
5 Confirm the dimension line type set (the one we used for thehorizontal reinforcement).
6 Set the leader to Man, click the Add Number button so that thenumber off factor is not displayed and place the label.
7 Click all the bars to which the leader is to point.
8 Press ESC to finish.
9 Click mark 6, confirm the settings and place the label.
10 Click all the bars to which the leader is to point and press ESC.
11 On the Repeat menu, click Label again and label marks 9, 10and 11. Click to disable the Diameter and Spacing options andset the leader to Aut. Define the position of the mark number asyou require.
Tip: To modify the contentsor position of a label, clickthe label in question with theright mouse button and select
Modify Label on theshortcut menu.If you make modificationsand quit this tool withoutrepositioning the label, thechanges are applied and thelabel is not moved.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 337
Section A-A
12 Now create the labels for section B-B as shown below:
Section B-B
338 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
13 Complete the labels for the shaft walls as shown below:
Floor plan shaft walls t=30cm
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 339
Except for the horizontal, lateral corner ties, which will be displayedas a standard detail, the elevator pit has been reinforced completely.The last step involves defining the final clipping area of the shaftwalls.
To modify the clipping area
1 In the floor plan of the shaft walls, click an edge of the shell withthe right mouse button and, on the shortcut menu,choose Show Clipping Path .
2 Show in which view?Click section A-A.
3 Use Stretch Entities (Edit flyout) to modify the upper sectionborder just below the bottom level of the upper floor slab. Makesure that at least one bar of the transverse reinforcement is withinthe clipping area.
Section A-A
55
4 Click the clipping path you have just modified with the rightmouse button and, on the shortcut menu, select DeleteClipping Path.
5 As the clipping area exists twice – for the shell and thereinforcement – click the clipping path again and press ESC toquit the tool.
340 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Typical section
In this exercise, you will learn about the Place In View placingmode.
Tools: Objective:
FF Reinforcement: Enter
Component
Place: Place In View
Modify Number OffFactors
Typical sectionhorizontal corner reinforcement
The view-type placement allows you to assign placementquantities to a bar view without having to actually place thebars. The reinforcement is only displayed in one view.
This placing mode is useful for displaying typical details. Whenyou do not specify dimensions in the placement direction, youneed to determine the number of bars manually.
In this placing mode, the location of the placement in space isnot defined. The placement only affects the quantities (numberoff figures).
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 341
To create a typical section using FF Reinforcement’scomponent entry and to place it using the Place inView mode
1 Use the tools on the Draft and Text flyouts to draw a wall corneras a typical section, place it to the right of the floor plan of theshaft walls and label it (see below).
Assign the layer RU_ALL to the elements by clicking Select,Set Layers on the Format menu and double-clicking the layerRU_ALL.
Typical sectionhorizontal corner reinforcement
2 In the view where the shaft walls are displayed in plan, click areinforcing bar with the right mouse button.
The FF Reinforcement tool opens.Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
3 Click Enter component.
342 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
4 In the Select Component dialog box, double-click Wall corner.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 343
5 Enter the following global values in the first line of the WallCorner dialog box:Set the diameter to 12, the bar spacing to 0.10,the segment length to 0.80 and the concrete cover to 0.055.As the reinforcement in the corner is only required for assemblingpurposes, set the diameter to 8 and press OK to confirm.
6 Move the cursor to the left shell edge of the wall corner you havejust drawn. When the reinforcement expands automatically toadjust to the correct position, click with the left mouse button.
7 Click Cancel to skip the entry of the dimension in the placementdirection.When you enter a value here, the program uses the componentsettings you have specified to determine the number of thestirrups and the length of the longitudinal bars.
8 In which view?Click the view where the shaft walls are displayed in plan. Thisassigns the typical detail to this view.
9 The system prompts you to specify the position of the label forthe first U-shaped bar. Press ESC.
10 In the next dialog box, select Place In View and click OK toconfirm.
11 For Add Number, enter 14 (the number of horizontal bars) andset the Spacing to 0.10.
12 Enable the Add Number, Diameter and Spacing options andplace the label.
13 The system prompts you to define the position of the label for thesecond U-shaped bar. Press ESC.
344 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
14 The procedure is the same as for the first U-shaped bar.
15 For the length of the longitudinal bars, enter 1.35. Do not changethe other settings and press OK to confirm.
16 As the wall corner exists four times, click Modify Number OffFactors (Modify flyout).
17 Select placed reinforcement to modify number off factors:Select the entire reinforcement of the typical section, enter 4 forthe component factor and press ESC to quit the tool.
18 On the Repeat menu, click Dimension Line/Label and applylabels to the horizontal bars, (mark 15):
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 345
Bar schema
The following part of the exercise involves creating bar schemas. Wewill create full schemas which are true to scale drawn to scale andplace them beside the design.
Tools: Objective:
Full Schema
The Partial and Full Schema tools provide a way of displayingthe internal number-off and bending shape management in thereinforcement drawing. You can place a schema bar and label forevery mark in the drawing file. The schema will automaticallyupdate to reflect any changes you make to the placedreinforcement or bending shapes.
You can select between two different types of schemas:
• Full SchemaNumber off information on all the placements of a mark
• Partial SchemaNumber off information on a single placement of a mark
The bending shape can be drawn to scale or not and it can bedisplayed so that it is aligned with the placement.
346 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
To create a full schema
1 On the Display flyout, click Full Schema.
2 Select Meshes or Rebars on the Dynamic toolbar, and in thedialog line, enter the number of the mark based on which aschema is to be created or click the mark.
3 Enter the settings as shown above.
4 The schema and its label are attached to the crosshairs.You can use the Rotate and Mirror options to control theposition of the bars. Place the schema to the right of the sections.
5 Now you should be able to create the other bar schemas yourself.For straight bars, you can switch off leg dimensioning. Set thetext angle so that it matches the position of the bar shape.
Tip: If you have deleted a barwhile working, the bar’s marknumber will remain‘unassigned’.You can use RearrangeMarks to correct this.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 347
Reinforcement schedule and bending schedule
The last part of this exercise involves creating a reinforcementschedule and a bending schedule.
Tools: Objective:
Reinforcement Schedule
Steel Key
Reinforcement schedules are created as you work and are thusalways up-to-date. They can be printed out whenever required.
348 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Start by printing out the bar reinforcement schedule which Allplan2005 has created automatically.
To print out the bar reinforcement schedule
1 Click Reinforcement Schedule (Lists/Schedules flyout).
The entries in the Layout and Component areas are automaticallytaken from the name of the drawing file.Changes you make to these entries are retained. When you click
Use list head again, you can copy the names of the drawingand drawing file.
2 In the Schedule Number data entry box, enter B1. Using thisnumber, the reinforcement schedule can be retrieved later.
3 If you want, you can enable the Print current schedule checkbox. Click OK to confirm the dialog box.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 349
4 A dialog box appears in which you can select predefined scheduleforms.Do not change the settings and click OK to confirm the dialogbox.
5 Click All on the Dynamic toolbar.
6 The bar schedule is displayed in a separate window.Click Print to start printing.
In the last exercise, we printed out a reinforcement schedule that wasgenerated while we worked. But you can also create schedules forreinforcement drawings that have not been created with Allplan2005 such as drawings created manually on a drawing board. Theprogram will perform all the calculations.
To enter or modify reinforcement schedules
1 In the CAD Navigator select the Reinforcement Schedulesmodule.
2 The following dialog box appears. You can specify whether youwant to modify an existing reinforcement schedule or create anew schedule.
Tip: Mark-related parameterssuch as number off factor,steel grade, diameter andindividual length are saved bythe program and can beedited in the ReinforcementSchedules module.
The schedules available in theSelect List dialog box canonly be printed out after theyhave been generated asspecific information likebending shape is takenstraight from the drawingfile.
350 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
3 Click New.
4 Click Reinforcement Schedule.In the Schedule Header area, you can enter text as required.
5 Click the data entry boxes. Additional boxes appear – you canaccept the values or enter new values.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 351
352 Exercise 6: 3D Elevator Pit with Model (First Method) Allplan 2005
Allplan 2005 lets you create bending schedules and place themin layouts. To print out bending schedules, you can use theschedule called Bar schedule, bending shapes provided in the
Reinforcement Schedule tool.
In the next steps, we will create a bending schedule and place it in adrawing file.
To output a bending schedule to a drawing file
1 Click Steel Key (Lists/Schedules flyout).
2 Select the list you want to use and click OK to confirm the SelectList dialog box.
3 Select all the marks you want to include in the list.To select all marks, click All on the Dynamic toolbar.
4 Place the schedule in the workspace.It should now look like this:
The bending schedule is saved with the drawing file.
Printing out layouts is covered in “Unit 11: Plot Layout”.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 353
Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model(second method)
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthe following modules:
Shell Bar Reinforcement
Check the Engineering toolbar to see whether the following toolis available:
Reinforce with Model on/off
In exercise 6, you reinforced a 3D shell with the reinforcement modelbeing enabled (first method, see “Tip” on the left).
In the following exercise, you will create a symbol for a reinforcedprecast door lintel. To do this, you will apply reinforcement to a2D shell, with the reinforcement model being enabled (secondmethod, see ”Tip” on the left)..
Start by selecting fileset 3 with the following drawing files:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
3 301 2D shell
302 Bar reinforcement, model on
303 Modified door lintel
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Tip: Detailed information isprovided in the “Reinforcewith or without model?”chapter in the online Help.
354 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
Designing a reinforced door lintel
We will begin by creating an elevation and section view of a precastdoor lintel as the shell.To do this, we will use the tools in the Draft module.
After this, we will apply reinforcement with the tools in the Bar Reinforcement module. Use the flyouts on the Engineering
toolbar and the shortcut menu to access these tools.
Finally, we will save the precast door lintel as a symbol in a catalog.
Tools: Objective:
Reinforce with Model on
Enter:
Rectangular Stirrup
Straight Bar
Straight Bar as Point
Place:
Edge-Based
Bar-Based
Freehand
Dimension Line/Label
Write to Library
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 355
First, draw the shell.
To draw a two-dimensional shell
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),open the drawing file tree for fileset 3 and double-click drawingfile 301.
2 In the status bar, click the current Scale and select 1:50; click thecurrent Length and select m.
3 Create the drawing shown below using the tools in the Draftflyout. Use pen thickness 0.35 mm for the elevation and 0.50 mmfor the section. To do this, use the Rectangle and Linetools.
Assign the DE_GEN02 layer to the elements by clicking in theSelect, Set Layers list box (Format toolbar) and selecting thelayer DE_GEN02 .
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
The coordinate system and the 3D view (shown as dashed lines)are displayed as an aid to orientation and do not need to bedrawn.
4 Double-click in the workspace with the middle mouse button todisplay the entire image.
356 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
Now we will create and place the stirrup reinforcement in the beam.We will also define the orientation in three-dimensional space for theentire reinforcement (see “Tip” on the left).
The system proposes the layer BR_GEN. As, in this exercise, we donot need to differentiate between the bottom and top reinforcementlayers, we will retain this layer.
To create and place stirrups manually
1 Make drawing file 302 current and set 301 to edit mode.
2 Click Reinforce with Model on/off (Model flyout) to activatethe model (the icon is pressed in).
3 Click Enter (Create flyout).Check that the layer BR_GEN is selected. If it isn't, activate it viathe Format menu or toolbar.
4 Select Rectangular Stirrup, Closed.
5 Set the concrete cover on all sides to 0.03 and select 8 for thediameter.
6 Click two diagonally opposite points in the section and click acorner for the hook, at top right, for example.
Tip: Detailed information isprovided in the “Orientationin space” chapter in theonline Help.
Tip: You can also enterstirrups automatically usingthe FF Reinforcement tool(see exercise 6)
Tip: As you are creating a 3Dreinforcement cage, you needto provide the system with aspatial reference. In the caseof 3D shells, this spatial‘information’ is defined by theview.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 357
7 Select a projection for 3D position:The stirrup is located in the Y-Z plane and is to be placed in theX direction. Click X and press OK to confirm.
This setting defines the spatial orientation for the entirereinforcement.
8 Place the label for the bar in the section. Set the parameters sothat only the mark number is displayed.
9 Place the bar using the Edge-Based placing mode.
10 1st point of placing line:Bottom left end of beam.
11 2nd point of placing line:Bottom right end of beam.
12 Set viewing direction:Click in the workspace to the right of the bending shape. Theplaced area is selected (marked) and you can check whether thebar is located in the correct position. Press OK to confirm.
111012
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
13 Set the spacing to 0.10, select Show All Bars and click OK toconfirm.
Tip: You can alter how theplacement is displayed laterusing Modify PlacementDisplay Mode.
358 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
14 Press ESC, select the dimension line type and place thedimension line and label below the beam.
Note: If you have not yet worked through exercise 6, you need toselect layer RU_ALL, enable font 8 and set the aspect ratio to1.00. To do this click Dimension Line and then Properties.
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
15 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Next, we will create and place the longitudinal reinforcement of thebeam. The stirrup reinforcement we have just entered will serve as abasis.
To create and place the longitudinal reinforcement atthe bottom
1 Click Enter (Create flyout) again.
2 Click Straight Bar.
3 The concrete cover is set to 0.03 on all sides. Change ConcreteCover for Bar to 0.04 and set the Diameter to 14.
4 In elevation view, click the two ends of the beam at the bottom,working from left to right. This creates the bar.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 359
5 Set the parameters for the label as shown above and place it.
6 Select the Bar-Based placing mode and enter the placing areain the section from the corner at the stirrup at bottom left to thecorner of the stirrup at bottom right (see below).
44 66
5
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
7 Confirm the selected placement, set the Add Number valueto 4 and confirm your settings.
8 Press ESC, select the following dimension line type and click OKto confirm.
9 Set the parameters so that the number off value and the diameterare displayed. Place the label for the mark below the bars. Thesystem automatically draws a leader to all the bars.
360 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
To enter the longitudinal reinforcement at the top, you will learn touse a method that is particularly useful for reinforcing componentsin section or plan, without having to create an additional view.
To create the longitudinal reinforcement at the top andto place it freely
1 The Enter tool is still active.
2 Click Straight Bar as Point.
3 Set the Diameter to 12 and press OK to confirm.
4 Enter 1st point or bar length:Click the bottom left end of the beam.
5 Click the 2nd point:Click the bottom right end of the beam.
6 The bar length is determined by the program and displayed in thedialog line.To take the concrete cover (3.0 cm) at the start and end of the barinto account, enter a value that is 6.0 cm smaller: 1.93.
7 Place reinforcement or enter angle:For dx Offset and dy Offset enter 0.04 and set theReference Point to top right.
8 The intersected bar is attached to the crosshairs. Click the topright corner of the shell in the section.
9 You do not need to place a label. Press ESC.
10 Select the Freehand placing mode.
11 In which view?Click the beam displayed in elevation.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 361
12 Confirm the next settings.
13 For dx Offset enter 0.03 and for dy Offset enter 0.04 andclick the top right corner of the beam in elevation.
14 Press ESC, confirm the dimension line type and place the mark’slabel above the bar.
11
14
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
13 8
15 Click Mirror and Copy and mirror the longitudinal bar at thetop in the section.
16 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Now we will apply labels to all the bars that have not been labeledyet.
To label intersected bars later
1 Click Dimension Line/Label.
2 Press and hold the left mouse button, work from left to right andenclose the two top bars displayed in the section in a selectionrectangle ( Select elements in direction-dependent manner isenabled in the Filter Assistant).
3 Confirm the dimension line type and place the mark’s label abovethe bars. You can set the direction angle for the label in thedialog line. The system automatically draws a leader to all thebars.
362 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
As opposed to the bottom longitudinal bars, the program has notautomatically updated the number of the top longitudinal bars. Thisis due to the fact that the top bar you mirrored is a separateplacement and the label in the elevation view is only displayed forone placement. As the two bars are congruent (one behind the other),you cannot select both bars.
To obtain a label for the two bars, you can move a bar downwards,create the label and then move it back to its original position.
To label the top bars
1 Click Move (Edit flyout).
2 In the section, click a top bar and move it by entering dX = 0.00and dY = -0.10.
3 Use to delete the existing label for the top longitudinal bars inthe elevation.
4 Click Dimension Line/Label, use the brackets feature to selectthe two top longitudinal bars in the elevation and place themark’s label above the bars.
5 Click Move, got to the section and move the bar again byentering dX = 0.00 and dY = 0.10.
6 Press ESC to quit the tool. The drawing should now look like this:
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 363
Now that you have completed the reinforcement of the door lintel,you can save it as a symbol so that it is available as a typical detailfor future use. Then, we will retrieve it and modify it.Working with symbols has already been covered in “Unit 2: FirstSteps”.
To create and save symbols
1 Click Write to Library (Standard toolbar).
2 The reinforcement symbol is to be available to all users. In thePath area, select Office and in the Library area, select Symbol.
3 Press OK to confirm.The dialog box disappears. Now you are back in the workspace.
4 Keep the left mouse button pressed down and enclose thereinforcement symbol in a selection rectangle. It is displayed inthe selection color.
5 Now we need to define the symbol’s base point. Click the bottomleft corner of the beam in elevation view. This is the point atwhich the symbol will be attached to the crosshairs when it isretrieved.
6 In the dialog box, choose the option Dumb symbol (not snoop-enabled) and click OK to confirm.
7 Click the next available subfolder and enter a name: Typicaldetails.
8 In the Name area, choose an unassigned number and enter aname for the symbol: Door lintel.
9 To finish entering the symbol, press ESC.
Printing out layouts is covered in “Unit 11: Plot Layout”.
Tip: You can also change theposition of a symbol’s basepoint when you retrieve it.
364 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
Modifying the door lintel
In this exercise, we will retrieve the door lintel and modify it.
Tools: Objective:
Get from Library
Stretch Entities
New Mark Number
Modify Placement
Rearrange Marks
Modify Mark
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
This exercise also requires fileset 3:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
3 301 2D shell
302 Bar reinforcement, model on
303 Modified door lintel
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Start by retrieving the symbol and placing it in a separate drawingfile.
To retrieve symbols
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar) anddouble-click drawing file 303.
2 In the status bar, click the current Scale and select 1:50; click thecurrent Length and select m.
3 Click Get from Library (Standard toolbar).
4 In the Path area, select Office and in the Library area, selectSymbol.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 365
5 Press OK to confirm. The Get Symbol dialog box appears.
6 Select Typical details and Door lintel.
7 Press OK to confirm.Now you are back in the workspace. The symbol is attached tothe crosshairs at its base point.
8 To place the symbol, click in the workspace.
9 To quit symbol retrieval mode, press ESC.
10 Double-click in the workspace with the middle mouse button todisplay the entire image.
The next steps involve modifying the inside dimensions of the dooropening and the width of the door lintel. In addition, we will modifythe spacing between the stirrups placed in the middle and thediameter of the bottom longitudinal reinforcement.As you saved the door lintel with the 2D shell when you defined thesymbol, you do not need to create the shell again. When you savejust the reinforcement as a symbol, you can also place it in a newshell.
To modify the dimensions of the door lintel
1 Click Stretch Entities (Edit flyout).
2 Go to the right-hand part of the section, press and hold theleft/middle mouse button and enclose the stirrup leg on the rightand the top and bottom corner bars in a selection rectangle.
3 Enter dX = 0.06 and dY = 0.00 to change the width to 30 cm.The shell and reinforcement will update automatically.
4 Now use the same approach to modify the area on the left in theelevation (dX = -1.00 and dY = 0.00).
366 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
The door lintel should now look like this:
2
2
4
4
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
In the next exercise, we will alter the distance between thereinforcement in the middle of the beam. First, we will assign a newmark number. Then we will modify the distance and rearrange themarks so that the stirrup reinforcement is combined to a single markagain. After this, we will change the diameter of the bottomlongitudinal reinforcement.
To modify reinforcement
1 Click New Mark Number (Modify flyout).
2 What is to become a new mark?Press and hold the left/middle mouse button, work from left toright and enclose the 14 stirrups in the middle of the beam in aselection rectangle ( Select elements in direction-dependentmanner is enabled in the Filter Assistant).
3 The system proposes a new mark number (based on the last marknumber assigned plus one). Accept it and press ESC.
4 Right-click a stirrup in the middle and select ModifyPlacement on the shortcut menu.
5 Change the Spacing to 0.20, confirm the settings and press ESCto quit the tool.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 367
2
2
4
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
6 Click a bar with the right mouse button and select RearrangeMarks on the shortcut menu in order to combine the two marksto a single mark.
7 Do not change the settings and click OK to confirm.
8 Delete the label for the stirrups in the elevation,click Dimension Line/Label and use the brackets feature toselect all the stirrup in the elevation.
9 For the Dimension Line Type, select the dimension line withoutdimension text , enable the Number Off and Spacingoptions and place the dimension line.
10 For the label, turn the spacing details off, place the label andpress ESC to quit the tool.
11 Click the bottom longitudinal reinforcement with the right mousebutton and, on the shortcut menu, choose Modify Mark.
368 Exercise 7: 2D door lintel with model (second method) Allplan 2005
12 In the Modify Mark dialog box, click Diameter and enter 16.
13 Confirm your entries and press ESC to quit the tool.
Your drawing should now look like this:
Door Lintel 1:50Elevation Section
Finally, you can create a bar schema. The approach is the same as forthe elevator pit in exercise 6. Consequently, it is not covered here.
As you have created the reinforcement with the model being enabled,you can use the tools in the Shell module to delete and create theelevation or section at any time. As opposed to the elevator pit, onlythe three-dimensional reinforcement cage is displayed (see “Tip” onthe left).
When a component is to be reinforced in plan only, you can create anew plan view provided the original elevation or section still exists.
Tip: Detailed information onthe Shell module isprovided in the online Help inthe section entitled“Reinforce with or withoutmodel?”.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 369
Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (thirdmethod)
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthe following modules:
Mesh Reinforcement
Bar Reinforcement
This exercise involves reinforcing a floor slab based on the 2D floorplan of the basement created in exercise 3. In this exercise we willnot work with the reinforcement model (third method, see “Tip” onthe left). This exercise is based on exercise 3.
Start by selecting fileset 4 with the following drawing files:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
4 102 2D plan
401 Reinforcement, bottom layer, model off
402 Reinforcement, top layer, model off
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Instead of drawing file 102, you can also open drawing file 101 ofexercise 3 in edit mode. In this case, set the status of the existinglayers to Modifiable and hide the hatching so that you can seebetter: click Show/Hide (Standard toolbar) and disable thehatching setting.
Tip: Detailed information isprovided in the “Reinforcewith or without model?”chapter in the online Help.
370 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
Mesh reinforcement, bottom layer
In this part of the exercise, you will create the mesh reinforcementfor the bottom layer.
To do this, you will use the tools in the Mesh Reinforcementmodule. Use the flyouts on the Engineering toolbar to access thesetools.
Tools: Objective:
Reinforce with Modeloff
Span Reinforcement
Start by making initial settings.
To select drawing files and to set options
1 On the View menu, click Default Configurations and selectEngineering Configuration (if you have not already done so).
2 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),open the drawing file tree for fileset 4, make drawing file 401current and open drawing file 102 in edit mode.
3 In the status bar, click the current Scale and select 1:50; click thecurrent Length and select m.
Tip: You can specify howmesh reinforcement isdisplayed in the Optionsfor the Mesh Reinforcementmodule.Detailed information isprovided in Allplan’s onlineHelp system.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 371
Now we will start by placing meshes in the span at bottom left in thefloor plan.
To create span reinforcement
1 Click Reinforce with Model on/off (Model flyout) to disablethe model (icon must not be pressed in).
2 Click Span Reinforcement (Create toolbar).The system proposes the layer MA_ALL.
3 Click in the Select, Set Layers list box (Format toolbar) andselect Set....
4 Select the List layers assigned to currently selected menu optionand double-click the layer MA_M_U.
5 From point or element / enter offset:In the dialog line, enter 0.15 for the support depth.
6 Define the placing polygon by clicking the interior corner of thewall at bottom left and then the corner at top right. Press ESC tofinish.
6
6
7 The support depth needs to be changed for the right and top sideof the polygon. Click Support Depth.
372 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
8 Click side of polygon:Click the side on the right and enter 0.12.
9 Repeat this procedure for the support depth at the top and clickOK to confirm the settings.
10 Click Mesh Type and select Q295.This sets the values for Longitudinal Overlap and
Transverse Overlap to 0.33 and 0.50 respectively.Define the other settings as shown above.
11 Click Toggle and select font 8.
12 Click OK to confirm your entries.The placement should now look like this:
13 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: When the TransverseOverlap option is enabled(button is pressed in), onlyentire meshes are placed. Thevalue proposed by the systemis displayed in the data entrybox and cannot be altered.
Tip: Allplan 2005automatically calculates theoverlap depending on thetype of reinforcing steel meshyou select. The placementalgorithms are designed witheconomic considerations inmind. However, this can bechanged at any time byspecifying the lap jointyourself. The lap joint can belabeled if required(see Options).
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 373
Next, we will apply reinforcement to the adjacent span on the right.
To place more meshes in span
1 Click Span Reinforcement (Create toolbar).
2 In the dialog line, enter 0.12 for the support depth.
3 Working counter-clockwise, click the inside corners of the spanand press ESC.
4 For the exterior wall, the support depth needs to be changedto 0.15.Click Support Depth, click the exterior wall, enter 0.15 andpress OK to confirm.
5 Set the mesh type to Q443 and the placing angle to 0.00 degrees.
6 Confirm.The reinforcing steel mesh placement is drawn and labeled.
7 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Tip: The shell polygon of thearea reinforcement placed isdisplayed in construction lineformat. Clicking this polygonselects the entire placement.
374 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
Now place the reinforcing steel meshes as shown below. The supportdepth at the interior walls is 0.12. At the exterior walls it is 0.15.
Finally, you can apply various labels.
• Use Label to label meshes at a later stage if you inadvertentlydeleted the text, for example.
• Use Dimension Overlap to manually dimension mesh overlapsin longitudinal and transverse direction. Labels are appliedautomatically in this process.
• Use Mesh Dimensions to select labels for dimensions asdimensions with the same mark number only need to be labeledonce.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 375
Recess
This section involves applying reinforcement to the slab openingcreated for the elevator shaft.
To do this, you will use the tools in the Bar Reinforcementmodule. Use the flyouts on the Engineering toolbar to access thesetools.
Tools: Objective:
Edge Reinforcement
AdditionalReinforcement
Rearrange Marks
Start by placing open stirrups around the elevator shaft.
To create edge reinforcement
1 Click Edge Reinforcement (Enter Area Reinforcementtoolbar).The system proposes the RU_ALL layer.
2 Click in the Select, Set Layers list box (Format toolbar) and selectSet....
3 Select the List layers assigned to currently selected menu optionand activate the layer RU_R_U via the shortcut menu.
4 Select the List existing layers in open drawing files option andset the layer MA_M_U to Hidden, frozen so that you can seebetter.
376 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
5 Enter the 1st edge point or click a line:Click the bottom inside corner in the shaft wall on the right.
6 2nd point:Click the top inside corner.
7 To specify the direction point, click the slab to the right of theshaft wall.
8 Click Support Depth, click a side of the polygon and enter theoffset. Enter –0.03 for the side towards the recess and 0.00 for allthe other sides.
9 Enter 0.70 for the Edge Reinforcement Length and click OK toconfirm.
10 In the next dialog box, set Diameter to 8 and Spacing to 0.15. Then click the Shape button.
11 In the Bending Shape Defaults dialog box, select the bendingshapes for the start and end of the bar as shown above.
12 Enter values for the a and b parameters as shown above and clickOK to confirm.
Tip: You can use the Shape for each side ofpolygon parameter to definethe bending shape at theedges of the shell polygon,regardless of the generalbending shape selected forthe reinforcing bars. Thisallows you to define hooks atthe supports and createstraight lap joints at the sametime, for example.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 377
13 Set the display mode to Show Selected Bars, switch the startpoint so that the placement begins on the left and click OK toconfirm.
14 Select the bars to be displayed and place the dimension line andthe label.
• Click Dimension Line � and select layer RU_R_Uand font 8.
• Disable the No.+Dist. option for the dimension line and selectAdd Number, Diameter and Spacing for the label.
15 The next edge point for the next placement is now displayedattached to the crosshairs. Click the corner at top left, set theparameters and complete the edge reinforcement as shown in theillustration below.
378 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
We now need to create the longitudinal reinforcement.
To place additional reinforcing bars as areareinforcement
1 Click Additional Reinforcement (Enter Area Reinforcementtoolbar).
2 On the Dynamic toolbar, click From-to.
3 Enter start point:Click the top inside corner in the shaft wall on the right.
4 Enter end point:Click the bottom inside corner.
5 Make the following settings:
Diameter 12Bar Displacement 0.04Spacing 0.07Bar Length 4.00Shape straight bar(Number of) Bars 3
Show All Bars.
6 Press OK to confirm.
7 Place the dimension line and the label. Set the text parameters sothat only the Number off value and the Diameter are displayed.
8 Now place the additional reinforcement above the three othershaft walls.The bar length for the upper and lower placement is 4.0 m. Forthe placement on the left, it is 5.0 m.
9 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 379
10 Although the same bar shape has been placed along each edge,the individual placements have been assigned consecutive marks.Click Rearrange Marks (Modify flyout) and confirm thesettings.
11 Finally, click in the Select, Set Layers list box and select Set....
12 Click in the layer structure with the right mouse button and, onthe shortcut menu, choose Match Visibility from Layer Set.
13 Select the Reinforcement, bottom layer layer set, enable the Setall layers visible in the layer set to modifiable option and pressOK twice.
The floor plan with the entire reinforcement (bottom layer) butwithout hatching is displayed.
14 Move the labels of the bar and mesh reinforcement so that theydo not collide.
The drawing should now look like this:
380 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
Support reinforcement / spacers
In this exercise, we will create support reinforcement. Finally, we willenter spacers.
To do this, you will use the tools in the Mesh Reinforcementmodule. Use the flyouts on the Engineering toolbar to access thesetools.
Tools: Objective:
Support Reinforcement
Place Individually
Modify FormatProperties
Start by making initial settings.
To select drawing files and to set options
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),make drawing file 402 current and check that drawing files 102and 401 are still open in edit mode.
2 Check the current scale in the status bar and, if required, set it to1:50. The current unit of length should be set to m.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 381
Now we will create the support reinforcement.
To create support reinforcement
1 Click Support Reinforcement (Create toolbar).
2 Click Select, Set Layers on the Format menu, match thevisibility of the layers from the Reinforcement, top layer layerset to hide the reinforcement at the bottom, select the List layersassigned to currently selected menu option and double-click thelayer MA_M_O.
3 Enter the 1st support point, the direction or an angle:Enter 90.0.
4 Click the diagonally opposite points in the wall.
5 Click Support Reinforcement Length and set it to 1.50.
6 Click Support Depth and make the following settings: 0.15for the exterior wall and 0.12 for the interior wall.
4
4
382 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
7 The area delimited by a dashed line represents the placinggeometry.
8 Press OK to confirm the dialog box.
9 Set the Mesh Type to R378 and click OK to confirm.The reinforcing steel mesh placement is drawn.
10 Press ESC to quit the tool.
Edge reinforcement
The Edge Reinforcement tool in the Mesh Reinforcementmodule is equivalent to the tool with the same name in the BarReinforcement module. The procedure was described with theedge reinforcement around the slab recess. The procedure forselecting the mesh type and setting the parameters is the same asfor the tools we have already used in the MeshReinforcement module. Consequently, this tool is not describedany further here.
A special placing mode – surplus mesh placement – can be usedfor edge reinforcement. To do this, create a reinforcing steelmesh cutting diagram and place it in the drawing. Then you canclick a left-over mesh and place it in its entirety or just parts ofit (see further down).
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 383
Spacers
Generally speaking, spacers are only important when steel isordered and should therefore be included in reinforcementschedules. But this is only possible when the drawing file withthe reinforcing steel meshes contains the data required forcalculating the steel quantities.You can display spacers in two ways:
• You can define the placing area for the spacers using the Span Reinforcement tool. Areas without reinforcement at
the top can be entered as recesses. Then select spacer for theMesh Type.When you create the placement in construction line mode, itis displayed on screen but not printed out. Advantage: thenumber of required spacers is calculated automatically.Disadvantage: the cutting diagram and the reinforcing steelmesh schedule contain incomplete spacers. This does notreflect standard on-site and bending shop practice (onlyentire spacers are ordered and supplied).
• You can define a spacer using the Place Individually tooland calculate the required number yourself. This is arelatively fast approach and fully appropriate for displaypurposes.
384 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
In the last step of this exercise, we will enter spacers using the PlaceIndividually tool.
To enter spacers
1 Click Place Individually (Create toolbar).
2 Click Mesh Type and select spacer U16. Enter the requirednumber (e.g. 120). For the number of meshes, enter 2 and set thelayer number to 60. Set the placing angle to 0.00 degrees.
3 Set placing parameters / specify placing location:Click anywhere in your drawing and press ESC to quit the tool.
4 Click Modify Format Properties (Edit flyout), select theConvert 2D entities to construction lines option, click OK toconfirm and select the meshes you have just created (assumingthat you want to exclude the spacers from subsequent printouts).
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 385
Cutting diagram / excess reinforcing steel mesh
To finish, you will create a cutting diagram for the bottom meshreinforcement layer and place excess mesh.
Use the flyouts on the Engineering toolbar to access the tools.
Tools: Objective:
Cutting Diagram
Place Individually
Start by creating the cutting diagram for the bottom reinforcementlayer.
To create a cutting diagram, a drawing file with reinforcing steelmeshes must be current. If the reinforcing steel meshes to beincluded in a cutting diagram are located in different drawingfiles, open the other drawing files in edit mode. Meshes onvisible but frozen layers are not included in the cutting diagram.
386 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
To output a cutting diagram to a drawing file
1 Make drawing file 401 current and open drawing files 102 and402 in edit mode.
2 On the Format toolbar, select pen thickness 0.25 mm andlinetype 1.
3 On the Format menu, click Select, Set Layers and set thelayer MA_M_U to Modifiable and the layer MA_M_O to Visible,frozen.
4 Click Cutting Diagram (Lists/Schedules flyout).The Cutting Diagram dialog box appears:
5 Click Generate Cutting Diagram.
6 The schedule header appears. Enter the drawing number andmore.
7 The diagram is generated in a separate window.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 387
8 Click to place the cutting diagram in the drawing file.
You can also save the cutting diagram in the drawing file andplace it in the layout later. This way, the cutting diagram will beincluded in printouts.
Tip: To output the cuttingdiagram to the printer, usethe Mesh Schedule tool
388 Exercise 8: 2D slab without model (third method) Allplan 2005
As the cutting diagram is in a separate window, you can see whichexcess pieces are left. You can click and then place these.
To place excess mesh
� You have created a cutting diagram and placed it in the drawingfile.
1 Click Place Individually (Create toolbar).
2 Select a layer. Make sure that you do not mix the bottom and topreinforcement layers.
3 Click Copy.
4 In the cutting diagram, click a piece of excess reinforcing steelmesh that you wish to place.
5 Place it. You can retain the dimensions of the reinforcing steelmesh copied automatically or reduce them. The cutting diagramupdates automatically.
Printing out layouts is covered in “Unit 11: Plot Layout”.
Tip: Changing the dimensionsof an excess will create a newreinforcing steel mesh. Thecutting diagram does notupdate automatically toreflect this change.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 389
Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthis module:
BAMTEC
In this exercise you will manually create BAMTEC carpetreinforcement based on FEA calculation results. In other words, theFEA results are not used automatically. You will work withoutreinforcement model (third method, see “Tip” on the left) as you willcreate a floor plan without sections.
To do this, you will use the tools in the BAMTEC module. Use theflyouts on the Engineering toolbar to access these tools.
Start by selecting fileset 5 with the following drawing files:
Fileset Drawing filenumber
Drawing file name
5 501 Structure
502 Carpet geometry
503
504
This fileset is in the Tutorial project (see “Unit 3: ProjectOrganization”).
Tip: Detailed information isprovided in the “Reinforcewith or without model?”chapter in the online Help.
390 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
Tools: Objective:
Carpet Outline
Separate into Files
Carpet Mounting Strips
Basic CarpetReinforcement
Additional CarpetReinforcement
BAMTEC File
Get from Library
The following exercise is based on the slab outline shown below. Theprocess of creating and applying fully automatic reinforcement tothis slab outline is described in detail in the finite elements step-by-step guide for Allplan 2005. For this exercise, we will use the FEAresults from this step-by-step guide and reinforce the area withhatching (see below).
To copy or draw the slab outline
1 If you have already performed FEA calculations for this example,copy the floor plan (consisting of grid, walls and recesses) todrawing file 501.Arrange the walls, beams, columns, recesses and the grid ondifferent layers.
2 If these drawing files are not available, you can draw the outlineof the slab using the tools in the Walls, Openings,Components or Draft modules. Arrange the design entities(grid, walls, beams, columns and recesses) on different layers -all you need to do is use the layers proposed by the system.
Tip: Read the section entitled"BAMTEC module – Basics" inthe online Help system:
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 391
392 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
Start by making initial settings.
To select drawing files and to set options
1 On the View menu, click Default Configurations and selectEngineering Configuration (if you have not already done so).
2 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar),make drawing file 502 current and open drawing file 501 in editmode.
3 Check the current scale in the status bar and, if required, set it to1:100. The current length should be set to m.
4 On the Format toolbar, select pen thickness 0.25 mm andlinetype 1.
5 Click Reinforce with Model on/off (Model flyout) to disablethe model (icon must not be pressed in).
The first step involves defining the carpet outline, that is, its size,unroll direction, label and position of the carpets in the slab.
Certain technical criteria pertaining to the application guidelinesfor the BAMTEC reinforcement technology have to be observed(see “Tip” on page 390)!
To define the carpet outline
1 Click Carpet Outline (BAMTEC flyout).The system proposes the layer BA_B.
2 Click in the Select, Set Layers list box (Format toolbar) and selectSet....
3 Select the List layers assigned to currently selected menu optionand double-click the layer BA_B_U_1.
4 From point or element / enter offset:In the dialog line, enter 0.00 for the support depth. Press ENTERto confirm.
5 To create the first carpet, use the inside wall corner in the B/1axis for the starting point.
Tip: You can specify howBAMTEC reinforcement isdisplayed using the
Options for theBAMTEC module.Detailed information isprovided in Allplan’s onlineHelp system.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 393
6 In the dialog line, enter a value of 14.10 for the X Coordinateand a value of –14.25 for the Y Coordinate and press ENTERto confirm.
7 Press ESC to close the polyline and click OK to confirm the thisdialog box:
8 On the Carpet Outline Context toolbar, enter an angle of 180degrees. This defines the position of the first bar and thus theunrolling direction.
9 Enter 0.10 m for the distance between the first bar and the edge.
10 Define the carpet label as shown. “B 1.1” stands for ‘bottom layerof the first carpet in slab 1’
11 Press OK to confirm the entries.The carpet outline is created with the unroll direction, first barand label.
12 Now you can enter the next carpet. Repeat steps 4 thorough 11and create the other carpets. Name them B1.2, B1.3, B1.4., B1.5and B1.6.Please read the following section first.
394 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
Enter the outlines of the carpets B1.2 and B1.3 for the longitudinaldirection yourself. Please note the following:
• In the D and F axes, the carpets are joined without overlap.
• When you define the carpet outline for carpet B1.3, do notinclude the rectangular area at bottom left between gridpoint G/1and the top right corner of the recess as this would cause theprogram to generate illegal reinforcing bars. The offset around therecess needs to be set to 0.05 m.
• The values displayed above on the Carpet Outline Context toolbarapply to the carpets B1.4, B1.5 and B1.6. The angle for the unrolldirection (90 instead of 180 degrees) and the offset to the first bar(0.05 instead of 0.10 m) are different. Use the layer BA_B_U_2.
• The carpets B1.4 and B1.5 are 12.00 m long in the transversedirection. With an overlap length of 0.50 m, the length of carpetB1.6 is 12.70 m. Like carpet B1.3, carpet B1.6 has a recess in thebottom left area.
• To define the lap joint, specify the start point by moving thecrosshairs to the bottom left corner of the carpet previouslycreated. Then enter a value of 0.50 in the Y Coordinate dataentry field, which is highlighted in yellow. In this case, the offsetvalues are 0.00.Alternatively, you can enter an offset of -0.50 for the top side ofthe outline of the carpets B1.4 and B1.5.
Compare what you have drawn with the finished carpet placingdrawing below.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 395
396 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
Before you can create the reinforcement for the carpets, you need todistribute the individual carpets in the placing drawing onto differentdrawing files.. We will use the carpet B1.1 as an example.
To distribute carpets onto different drawing files
1 Click Separate into Files (BAMTEC flyout).
2 In the File Settings and Reinforcement Mode dialog box, enablethe Copy ONE carpet outline polygon to a different drawing fileoption.
3 Activate the check box in the File Splitting area and click OK toconfirm.
4 Click the first bar of carpet B1.1.
5 In the Select File dialog box, confirm drawing file number 503.The program automatically creates drawing files 503 (data forassembly drawing) and 504 (layout). (See for yourself: click .)
Based on carpet B1.1, you will now learn about the tools used toreinforce carpets manually. You will use the following tools:
Carpet Mounting Strips
Basic Carpet Reinforcement
Additional CarpetReinforcement
For production reasons, the following values defining thespacing between mounting strips must be adhered to:the first mounting strip begins after 52.5 cm. After this, themounting strips have to be arranged at a distance of 1.55 m.
Tip: You can also separate allthe carpets in one go byselecting theCopy ALL carpet outlinepolygons to differentdrawing files option.
Tip: As opposed to manualreinforcement, the
Reinforce tool is used toreinforce carpetsautomatically.This tool is designed witheconomic considerations inmind, allowing you to createa structurally adequatereinforcement system in afully automatic manner.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 397
To place mounting strips
1 Click Open on a project-specific basis (Standard toolbar) anddouble-click drawing file 503.
2 Click Carpet Mounting Strip (BAMTEC flyout) and selectlayer BA_B_U_1.
3 As you have already separated the carpets, this drawing filecontains an outline polygon. On the Dynamic toolbar, click Copy.
4 Select the shell polygon you want to use:Click the outline and press OK to confirm.
5 On the Carpet Mounting Strip Context toolbar, make thefollowing settings:
Spacing 1.55,
Angle 90° (entering an angle of 90° places the start point atbottom right. Productions also starts at this point),
Offset to Starting Edge 0.515,Linetype for Bar 4.
6 Click OK to confirm your entries.
7 The mounting strips are displayed in the selection color. Thedimension line is displayed attached to the crosshairs. You do notneed to dimension the mounting strips manually as they will bearranged automatically by the production machine. Click Cancelto quit the Context toolbar.
8 Press ESC to quit the Carpet Mounting Strip tool.
398 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
For the basic carpet reinforcement, we will define a diameter of 12mm and an offset of 20 cm. In addition, it will be assigned marknumber 3.
To define the basic carpet reinforcement
1 Click Basic Carpet Reinforcement (BAMTEC flyout).
2 Assign basic reinforcement to which carpet:Click the carpet outline polygon.
3 Enter the following parameters on the Basic CarpetReinforcement Context toolbar:Diameter 12,
Spacing 0.20,
Offset to Starting Edge 0.100,Linetype for Bar 1.
4 Click OK to confirm your entries.
5 The basic reinforcement is displayed in the selection color. TheContext toolbar for the dimension line appears.
• Click Dimension Line � and select layer BA_B_U_1and font 8.
• Enable the Show dimension line option and place thedimension line in the workspace.
6 On the Context toolbar, set the label parameters so that the AddNumber, Diameter and Spacing values are included and place thelabel in the workspace.
7 Press ESC to quit the Basic Carpet Reinforcement tool.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 399
We will place five different types of additional reinforcement incarpet B1.1 (marks 4,5,6,7, and 8).
To create additional carpet reinforcement
1 Click Additional Carpet Reinforcement (BAMTEC flyout) andselect the layer BA_B_U_1.
2 Set the following parameters on the Additional CarpetReinforcement Context toolbar:
Diameter 8,
Reference point (point at which placement starts): top left, dx offset = 0.60,
dy offset = 1.402,
Bar Length 4.70,
Spacing 0.20,
Angle = 180°Number of Bars 21.
3 Place the additional reinforcement at the top left corner of thecarpet outline polygon.
4 The additional reinforcement is displayed in the selection color.Place the dimension line and the label using the settings proposedby the system.
Tip: The preview displays theplacement while you aremaking entries. This way, youcan visually check the settingsyou make as you go along.
400 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
We will now create more additional reinforcement. Repeat steps 2 to4 and use the settings given in the following section.
To create more additional reinforcement
1 The Additional Carpet Reinforcement tool is still active.
2 Make the following settings on the Context toolbar: Diameter 10,
Reference point (point at which placement starts): top left, dx offset = 0.75,
dy offset = 5.601,
Bar Length 4.55,
Spacing 0.20,Number of Bars 19.
3 Place the additional reinforcement at the top left corner of thecarpet outline polygon.
4 Place the dimension line and the label.
5 The Additional Carpet Reinforcement tool is still active.
6 Make the following settings on the Context toolbar: Diameter 8,
Reference point (point at which placement starts): top left, dx offset = 0.85,
dy offset = 9.402,
Bar Length 4.10,
Spacing 0.20,Number of Bars 12.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 401
7 Place the additional reinforcement, the dimension line and thelabel.
8 The Additional Carpet Reinforcement tool is still active.
9 Make the following settings on the Context toolbar: Diameter 10,
Reference point (point at which placement starts): top left, dx offset = 0.75,
dy offset = 11.801,
Bar Length 4.35,
Spacing 0.20,Number of Bars 13.
10 Place the additional reinforcement, the dimension line and thelabel.
11 The Additional Carpet Reinforcement tool is still active.
12 Enter the following settings on the Context toolbar. Do not forgetto change the reference point:
Diameter 8,
Reference point (point at which placement starts): top right, dx offset = 0.80,
dy offset = 12.202,
Bar Length 3.80,
Spacing 0.20,Number of Bars 11.
402 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
13 Place the additional reinforcement at the top right corner of thecarpet outline polygon.
14 Place the dimension line and the label.
15 Press ESC to quit the Additional Carpet Reinforcement tool.
You can use the Reinforcement Schedule and Steel Key tools togenerate a wide range of reinforcement schedules.
The next step involves creating a BAMTEC file for carpet B1.1.
To create a BAMTEC file
1 Click BAMTEC File (Lists/Schedules flyout).
2 Select placements based on which BAMTEC file is to be created:Use the Brackets feature (Filter Assistant toolbar) or themiddle or left mouse button to select all the placements.
3 Set the definition point:Specify the local reference point of the carpet. The systemproposes two points. Click the point at bottom right.A dimensioning symbol is create at the point you clicked.
4 Place the name of the carpet file as required.
As the carpet is still missing the symbols required for the actualproduction, we will create them in the next step (this is not necessarywhen carpets are reinforced automatically).
To place BAMTEC symbols
1 Click Get from Library (Standard toolbar).
2 In the Library area, select Symbol and in the Path area, selectBAMTEC Drawing Symbols and click OK to confirm.
3 In the Get Symbol dialog box, select the BAMTEC Symbols fileand click ROLL-UP 1:50 (symbol number 7). Press OK to confirmthe dialog box.
4 Place the symbol with the text to the right of the carpet.
Tip: If drawing file 504 isopen in edit mode, thedefinition point has alreadybeen defined when youseparated the carpets.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 403
5 Click Delete (Edit flyout) and delete all the redundantelements.
6 Use Move (Edit flyout) to move the other text elements intothe correct position.
This bar is displayed in red
Based on the approach described for carpet B1.1, you should now beable to reinforce carpet B1.4 yourself. For the start point, use thebottom left corner of the carpet. To define the spacing between theadditional reinforcement, enter the following values (reference pointat top/bottom right):
Additional reinforcement 1 (mark 3): dX = 3.551, dY = 1.35
Additional reinforcement 2 (mark 4): dX = 7.750, dY = 0.85
Additional reinforcement 3 (mark 5): dX = 9.551, dY = 0.00
Additional reinforcement 4 (mark 6): dX = 0.151, dY = 0.00
Additional reinforcement 5 (mark 7): dX = 3.751, dY = 0.00
404 Exercise 9: BAMTEC® Reinforcement Allplan 2005
Carpet B1.4 should look like this when finished:
Printing out layouts is covered in “Unit 11: Plot Layout”.
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 405
Cross-Section CatalogsThis chapter shows two examples of cross-sections catalogs. You willlearn how to modify mesh cross-section catalogs and enter newcustom meshes.
The Cross Section Catalogs module contains self-explanatoryforms for managing and updating bar and mesh cross-sectioncatalogs. Using these forms, you can view individual cross-section catalogs and output them to the screen or to a printer ina comfortable and easy manner. Not only can you modifyexisting cross-section catalogs but you can also define newcatalogs (custom reinforcing steel meshes, for example).
In the next steps, we will change the length of a standard stock meshfrom 6.00 m to 12.00 m.
To modify a mesh cross-section catalog
1 In the CAD Navigator select the Cross Section Catalogsmodule in the Engineering family. The following dialog boxappears:
406 Cross-Section Catalogs Allplan 2005
2 Click Stock Meshes – BST 500 M and then Edit. A full overviewof the mesh cross-section catalog is displayed:
3 Click a mesh and then Edit.The following dialog box appears:
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 407
4 For the length of the mesh, enter 12.00 m.
5 The weight of the mesh updates automatically to reflect thechange you have made. this way, you can modify and savesettings without any problems.
Next, we will enter a new custom mesh.
To enter a new custom mesh
1 In the CAD Navigator select the Cross Section Catalogsmodule in the Engineering family.
2 In the Cross-Section Catalogs dialog box, click New. Thefollowing dialog box appears:
408 Cross-Section Catalogs Allplan 2005
3 Click Mesh X-Section Catalog.Another dialog box appears:
4 Click in the Label data entry box and enter Custom Meshes.
5 Click in the Steel grade data entry box and enter 500 M.
6 Click New.A dialog box shows which meshes can be defined and how:
Manual Unit 6: Reinforcement Drawing 409
Stock mesh without display of individual bars; onlythe length, width and overlap are variable.
Stock mesh with display of individual bars;parameters are entered in a dialog box.
Stock mesh can be designed in the workspace.
Custom mesh without edge bars; parameters areentered in a dialog box.
Custom mesh with edge bars; parameters are enteredin a dialog box.
Custom mesh can be designed in the workspace.
Fully user-defianble custom mesh with any barcombination; can be designed in the workspaceusing special tools.
Spacer with/without individual bars; entered in thesame way as stock mesh without bar display.
Spacer with display of individual bars; can bedesigned in the workspace.
7 Click Custom mesh, without edge bars.
8 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new mesh:Custom Mesh 1.
410 Cross-Section Catalogs Allplan 2005
9 Now you can set the parameters as required. Start by enteringvalues for the length, width and the spacing between the bars.The overlap settings are dependent on these values.
10 Save the settings you make and finish.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 411
Unit 7: Layout OutputThis unit deals with printing and plotting.In the two exercises that follow you will learn about thebasic functions available for assembling and printing outlayouts.
� Using the tools in the Smart Symbols module, youwill create a title block as a label style.
� Using the tools in the Plot Layout module, you willprint out a layout containing the elevator pit youreinforced in exercise 6 (unit 6).
412 Requirements for Plotting Allplan 2005
Requirements for PlottingBefore you print or plot, the output device needs to be configuredcorrectly. If you are working in a network, you can use any deviceconnected to a remote machine (assuming it is configured correctly).
To do this, you first need to connect the output device.
For more detailed information, please consult your printer’s orplotter’s user guide or the documentation of the operating system.
Making a quick printout
Printing the screen contents to a printer or plotter was dealt with inexercise 2. This section covers the approach once again.
To print out the contents of the screen
1 Select the drawing files and layers you want to include in theprintout.
2 Click Print Preview (Standard toolbar).
3 Click Print Preview Options, select the Display tab andenable the Thick line check box This ensures that all the differentline weights are printed out as such.
If you want elements which are created as construction lines toappear in the printout, enable the Print construction lines checkbox. Specify the other options to suit your own preferences.
4 If necessary, set the scale in the print preview.
5 Click Set up printer and select a printer.
6 Click Print.
7 Press ESC to close the print preview.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 413
Exercise 10: Custom Title Block
Requirements:
Check in CAD Navigator to see whether you have licensedthis module:
Smart Symbols
Allplan provides a wide range of "intelligent" title blocks based onlabel styles. Label styles contain design entities, text and attributes.The advantage of a title block with attributes is that the text willupdate whenever the layout is opened..
You can create your own label styles or modify existing title blocksusing the tools in the Smart Symbols module. You can only useattributes if they have been assigned in ProjectPilot / Admin ....when you created the project.
Open an empty drawing file.
Tools:
Get from Library
Define label Style
414 Exercise 10: Custom Title Block Allplan 2005
To assign attributes
1 On the File menu, click Open Project…. .
2 Click Select Attributes…. .
3 Select the following attributes:Client, Location/plot, Architect, Structural analysis,Construction project name, Client address, Architect address,Address of person responsible for structural analysis.
4 Select the Tutorial project and click Settings….
5 Click Assign Attributes… and label the attributes by clicking inthe column on the right and then entering text.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 415
6 Press OK to confirm the settings and close the Project Attributesand Project Settings dialog boxes.
7 To close the Select Project dialog box, click Cancel.
The attributes you just assigned will now be used in the label stylefor the title block.You do not need to draw the title block from scratch. You can usethe one that you defined near the beginning of this workbook.
To create the title block as a label style
� Open an empty drawing file and close all the others.
� In the CAD Navigator select the Smart Symbols modulein the Bonus Tools family.
� Set the scale to 1:1.
1 Click Get from Library (Standard toolbar).
2 In the dialog box which appears, select the Office path and theText library.This is where you saved the title block in Unit 2.
3 Select Title block and then Original.
4 Place the title block and press ESC to close the dialog box.
5 Delete the text that is to be replaced by attributes (project-specificinformation).
Tip: Place construction-line format single pointsat the start of the originaltext items to be deleted(Draft module, Create flyout)so that you can position thecustom label styles quicklylater and with great accuracy.
416 Exercise 10: Custom Title Block Allplan 2005
6 Click Define Label Style (Create flyout).
7 On the Context toolbar, click Attribute.
8 Select Plan manager, click the attribute called Constructionproject, name and press OK to confirm.
Tip: To place text in exactalignment, you can use themiddle mouse button or the
Align Text tool (Textflyout).
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 417
9 Set the text parameters as shown below and change the format:A30.This defines the attribute as a text item with 30 charactersmaximum.
10 Set the attribute so that it is left-aligned in the box for theconstruction project details.
11 Repeat steps 7 through 9 and place the following attributes. Forthe Client address and Architect address attributes, set the textheight and width to 4.000 mm. For all the other attributes, set thetext height and width to 5.000 mm.
Category Attribute Format Text height
Plan manager Construction project, name A30 5.000 mm
Location/plot A30 5.000 mm
Client A22 5.000 mm
Client address A30 4.000 mm
Architect A22 5.000 mm
Architect address A30 4.000 mm
Structural analysis A22 5.000 mm
Person responsible forstructural analysis
A30 4.000 mm
Admin Plan name (1-50 characters) A40 5.000 mm
418 Exercise 10: Custom Title Block Allplan 2005
12 Click DefFol (Define Foil).
13 Enclose the entire title block in a selection rectangle using the leftmouse button.
14 Click the point at bottom right. This will serve as the referencepoint.
Title blocks must always be saved in subfolders 7 and 8 as thesesubfolders are associated with the Label tool in the PlotLayout module.
15 Click sub-folder number 8 and enter Title blocks.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 419
16 Click entry number 1 and enter Reinforcement drawing.
17 Press OK to confirm the Save Data dialog box.
18 Press ESC to quit the tool.The title block is now saved as a label style.
420 Exercise 11: Plot Layout Allplan 2005
Exercise 11: Plot LayoutPrinting out finished layouts is a critical step. In Allplan 2005, alayout is the element that you bring to paper.
As opposed to design using a conventional drafting board, the scopeof the layout does not have to be defined in advance.Generally, you leave the layout (which involves arranging and layingout drawing files and/or filesets) until you’re finished with thedesign. This is also the stage where you define the paper size, scale,border, angle, etcEach project can contain up to 3000 layouts.
Tools:
Page/Plotter Setup
Layout Border
Layout Element
Get from Library
Update Layout
Plot Layouts
Assembling the layout
In the following exercises you will set up a layout with the shell andreinforcement of the elevator pit. This involves two steps:
• Setting up the layout i.e. defining the sheet size and border.
• Selecting the elements for the layout i.e. the filesets/drawing filesand the title block.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 421
To define a layout
1 Select the Layout Editor (Standard toolbar).The icon remains pressed down until you quit the layout editorand switch back to drawing file edit mode.
The first time you click this button, the dialog box for selectinglayouts appears automatically. Click Open on a project-specific basis to select a layout.
2 Click in row 1, enter Elevator pit – reinforcement drawing forthe name and click OK to confirm.
3 Click Page/Plotter Setup (Create flyout).
4 Select the output device and paper format (e.g. DIN A2).
5 Click Layout Border (Create flyout).
6 Select DIN A2 for the border size.
Tip: The name you enter herewill appear as the Plan nameattribute in the title block!
Tip: Custom size lets youdefine your own borders.
422 Exercise 11: Plot Layout Allplan 2005
7 Define the Anchor Point and select the border type Filing margin(DIN 824 A).
8 Press OK to confirm.
9 Place the border in the bottom left inside corner of the sheet.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 423
Layout elements are mainly drawing files that you place in thelayout. Drawing files can be positioned individually or as a fileset.You can specify which layers are to be included in the printout byselecting a layer set.
To select layout elements
1 Click Layout Element (Create flyout).
2 On the Layout Element Context toolbar, click in the Fileset dataentry box, select fileset 2, Elevator pit and click to deactivatedrawing files 101, 201, 202 and 203.
3 Click the Layer box. You can use the options provided in thisdialog box to control the visibility settings of the layout elementsbased on the layers selected:
• The Layer set, current setting of the selected layer set optiononly displays elements on layers of the layer set currentlyselected.
• When you enable the Current, always use the current layersetting option, the visibility settings you defined using the
Select, Set Layers tool on the Format menu apply.
• The Fixed, save layer setting in the layout element optionlets you define the visibility setting for each layerindividually.
424 Exercise 11: Plot Layout Allplan 2005
4 Place the drawing files in the layout.
Now the next drawing file is automatically displayed attached tothe crosshairs.
5 Press ESC to finish selecting layout elements.
6 Click Label (Create flyout).
7 Click the layout border.
8 Click in the Label Style box.
9 In the Office folder, select the label style called ReinforcementDrawing and press OK to confirm.
10 Place the title block in the bottom right corner.Instead of attributes, the values assigned are now displayed.
Tip: To change the annotationfor the layout, switch to theText module and use thestandard tools for enteringand modifying text.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 425
The finished layouts are saved and can be plotted straight away orlater, as you choose. When you make changes in drawing files, youneed to adjust the extents of the files. To do this, you can use the
Update Layout (Modify flyout) tool.
Plotting layouts
The finished layout now needs to be plotted.
Before you follow the steps in the exercise below, check that theplotter has been correctly installed and configured.
To plot layouts
1 Click Plot Layouts (Create toolbar).
2 Select the output device (printer / plotter) in the Output tab.
You can also select a different output device and define the paperformat in this dialog box. If you have configured Nemetschekdrivers in the Services application, they will also be presented inthe device list.
Tip: You can make specificsettings for the plot operationin the Settings tab. For moreinformation, activate theonline Help system – all youneed to do is press F1.
426 Exercise 11: Plot Layout Allplan 2005
3 Select layout 1 in the Selection tab.
You can exclude specific elements (hatching, for example) fromthe plot operation in the Plot elements / options area.
4 Press OK to confirm.
5 Do you want to start plotting?Click Yes.The layout will then be plotted out.
Manual Unit 7: Layout Output 427
Layout windows
You can use layout windows to place just portions of drawing files orfilesets in a layout. This is useful if you want to display just specificareas or elements that are far apart in the fileset. In the followingexercise you will create layout windows and display sections ofindividual drawing files.
To create layout windows
� Open an empty layout.
1 Click Create Layout Window (Create flyout).
We will create the window so that the drawing file it is to displayis immediately available for selection.
2 Click ...and place associated layout elements.
3 Select drawing file 101 (File) and place it in the layout.
4 Select drawing 401 (File) and click within the boundary of thedrawing file you just placed.
5 Press ESC as no other drawing files need to be selected.
6 Define the size of the layout window by entering two diagonallyopposite points (bottom left and top right) with the left mousebutton.
7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create a layout window displayingdrawing files 204 and 205 (or 303).
8 Click Modify Layout Window (Modify flyout) and selectScale Layout Window.
This lets you change the size of the window.
428 Exercise 11: Plot Layout Allplan 2005
9 To change the arrangement of the layout windows, you can use Move (Edit flyout).
The result might look like this:
Manual Unit 8: Data Import 429
Unit 8: Data ImportAs the use of CAD systems becomes increasinglywidespread and the pressure to rationalize costs rises,data exchange is an issue that cannot be ignored. Whenworking together with architects and other peopleinvolved in a project, the question as to who is usingwhich CAD system is often top priority.
This unit provides an overview of the data formatssupported by Allplan and you will find out how toimport and export data as well as process this data.
430 General Information Allplan 2005
General InformationAs a wide range of different operating systems and data formats is inuse today, it is not always possible to exchange data seamlessly.Using what are known as ‘interfaces’, the data has to be adapted forthe target system. When all your partners are using Allplan 2005,then the effort involved in exchanging data is reduced significantly.You should nevertheless ask your data exchange partner for thefollowing information:
• What operating system was used to create the data?(Windows 2000, Windows XP)
• Which version was used to generate the design?
• What was saved? (Project, drawing file, ...)
• Is the data compressed and, if so, which compression utility wasused? Ask for self-decompressing files, if possible.
• Is the data 2D or 3D? Was the drawing created with the tools inAllplan 2005’s Walls, Openings, Components module?
Importing Allplan Data
Allplan 2005 runs on various operating systems. You may well begiven data that was created on a different operating system and thatyou wish to import.The tools you require are provided on the File menu in the Servicesapplication:
Manual Unit 8: Data Import 431
Compressed data
The volume of the data to be transferred usually exceeds the 1.44 MBthat will fit onto a floppy disk. You can therefore use a compressionutility to save the data. This compresses the data. Prior to importingthe data, you have to decompress it again. When you savecompressed data files, they are given filename extensions.
Allplan supports the following formats:
dxf, dwg standard uncompressedzip compressed with pkzipexe self-decompressing DXF/DWG/DGN
files (created with zip2exe)
arj to be decompressed with ARJ.EXElha to be decompressed with LHA.EXElzh to be decompressed with LHARC.EXEzoo to be decompressed with ZOO.EXE
In order to use Allplan 2005’s automatic decompression and importfeatures, the data you receive should be in the formats mentionedabove (contact the person with whom you are exchanging data). Asthere are different versions of the various compression utilities, theyshould always be included on the floppy disk.
432 Importing Allplan Data Allplan 2005
To import Allplan data
1 In the Services application, click Configuration and then BackupPath. Select the backup path from which the data is to beimported.
2 Click Data Backup and point to Restore Backup.
3 Click Named Project and select the project to which the data is tobe imported.
4 Select the project you wish to import and click OK.The files are decompressed automatically.
Tip: When you import data toan existing project, drawingfiles with the same numberswill be overwritten.
Manual Unit 8: Data Import 433
Importing DXF/DWG/DGN FilesYou can also import DXF, DWG and DGN files into Allplan 2005.Special ‘translation utilities’ are used to convert the data from the‘source CAD system’ to the ‘target CAD system’. Not only the data iscreated and saved but also the necessary conventions based on whichthe CAD data was generated.
Importing and converting DXF-format files involves three steps:
• Importing the DXF-format file into the data exchange directory.
• Creating a new project to ensure that no settings will beoverwritten when the data is imported.
• Converting the DXF data and importing it to the project using theInterfaces module.
To import a DXF-format file into Allplan 2005
1 In the Services application, activate the Configuration menu,select Backup Path for File and DXF/DWG and click Alwaysselect.
2 Click DXF/DWG and point to DXF/DWG/DGN File Admin.
3 Click Import DXF/DWG/DGN Files.Tip: More information isavailable on request.
434 Importing DXF/DWG/DGN Files Allplan 2005
4 Select Fully automatic.
5 Select Any folder and press OK to confirm.
6 The Select Folder dialog box appears. Select the drive and thefolder where the files to be imported are located.
7 If required, insert the medium with the files in the relevant driveand press OK to confirm. The program will recognize the fileformat and automatically use the correct program for importingdata.
8 If the file to be imported is an .exe file and you choose Yes at theconfirmation prompt, the data will be imported anddecompressed. If the data has been saved with the Fcopy utility,Frestore will be used. Follow the instructions displayed on screen.After this, the DXF test utility will start automatically.
9 Now the data exchange directory contains the DXF-format files.The next step involves converting the files to Allplan 2005 data.
Tip: If this Select dialog boxdoes not appear, check whichpath has been set in theServices application –Configuration – Backup Pathfor File and DXF/DWG.
Manual Unit 8: Data Import 435
To convert DXF-format files to Allplan 2005 data
1 Create a new project prior to importing the DXF files. For thisproject, set all the path settings to Project.
2 Select an empty drawing file and select the Interfaces module.
3 Click Import (Create toolbar).
4 Select the file(s) you want to convert.
5 Click Options.., enable Allow incomplete assignments in theGeneral Settings tab and press OK to confirm.Note: Allow incomplete assignments ensures that the file isconverted even if not all the elements are assigned.
6 Click Open.Allplan 2005 starts the automatic assignment.
7 Start the conversion process by clicking OK.Note: To check or modify the assignments, click Modify.
8 Then check the log file.
Tip: Detailed information onthe options available fortransferring DXF/DWG/DGN-format files is provided in theonline Help system.
436 Further Processing Allplan 2005
Further ProcessingThe modules available for processing the files you have importedvary depending on the data type.
Two-dimensional data
You can edit the data in the Draft module without having toperform further conversion processes. Set the required scale and, ifnecessary, modify the pen and line settings. To complete the design,you can add or delete individual elements like sections, details orhatching, dimensions and text.
Three-dimensional data
The following options are provided for editing 3D data:
• You can add 2D entities (in one drawing file, if possible).
• You can use the 3D Modeling and/or Walls, Openings,Components modules to complete your design.
• You can use the Shell module to generate sections and views orjust partial sections.
• You can also convert the data to 2D. Please note that the three-dimensional information (height = z axis) will be lost.
Manual Index 437
IndexA
access rights 168adding dimension line points
147additional carpet reinforcement
399additional reinforcement
(reinforcing bars) 378advanced point entry 57
enabling 99align
placing reinforcing bars 303attributes
assigning attribute values 414for projects 414matching 182
auto dimensioning 146
BBAMTEC
additional reinforcement 399basic carpet reinforcement
398carpet outline 392entering mounting strips 397separating 396symbols 402
BAMTEC 389bar reinforcement 298
bar-based 359freehand 360
bar schema 345bar-based 359basic carpet reinforcement 398basic tools toolbar 284batch mode 329beam 215bending schedule 352box 252bracket feature 77
Ccarpet mounting strips 397column 212COM navigation see shortcut
menucommon approaches in
ProjectPilot 162component axis 199component modeler 259component properties
column 212downstand beam, upstand
beam 215opening 219saving as favorites 235wall 196
compressed data 431coordinates
displaying 69entering 67
copyingbar reinforcement 306
creating a BAMTEC file 402cross-section catalogs 405CursorTips 71cutting diagram 386
Ddefaults 87, 88defining the reference point,
overview 224deleting
auto-delete segments 111general 132
dialog boxesuser-defined 108
dialog line 23dimension line parameters 141
saving 143setting 141
dimension lines
438 Index Allplan 2005
horizontal 144vertical 145
dimensioning 140adding dimension line points
147automatically 146horizontal 144setting parameters 141vertical 145
display sequence 35element property 36modifying 38values 36
displaying coordinates 69Door 218draft
precast balcony unit 127title block 106
drag handles see handlesdrawing file status 102drawing files
naming 104selecting 104understanding 101, 102
DXF/DWG/DGN files 433dynamic toolbar 20, 97
Eedge reinforcement
meshes 382reinforcing bars 375
editingusing handles 56
elementauto-delete segments 111
engineering configuration 97,284
engineering toolbar 284entering
polylines 236entering length values 67entering length values and
coordinates 67
Ffavorite 143
saving 235favorites 87, 88
FF reinforcementcomponent entry 341open stirrup 308, 318
filesetscreating, new 177
fill color 79Fillet 129flyouts 21Fold Line 136folded 291Folding a Line 136freehand 360full schema 346
Ggeneral polyline entry tools 236
Hhandles 56hatching 79
cutting out 153modifying 152reference scale 81setting parameters 151
heightabsolute values 198entering parameters 198
hidden line image 210hidden lines 210, 211hidden placement 332horizontal dimensioning 144
Iimporting Allplan data 430installation
softwarerequirements 8interfaces 435
Kkey plan 267
modifying 275
Llabel style
creating 415label styles 105labeling 424labeling reinforcing bars 336
Manual Index 439
layerselecting current layer 214
layers 166access rights 168advantages 170assignments 229attributes 167format properties 167general information 166in drawing files 171layer sets 183line attributes 182managing 170pen, line, color 182settings 182troubleshooting 229turning on and off 228visibility 169
layoutelements 423
layoutsdefining 421layer sets 183layout windows 427plotting 425
libraries 87library 121line attributes
for layers 182line spacing 115linetypes
for layers 182
Mmesh reinforcement 370model
reinforce with model (firstmethod) 285
reinforcing with model (secondmethod) 353
reinforcing without model(third method) 369
modificationstretch entities 136
modifyinghatching 152pen thickness 112
text parameters 119modifying a mesh cross-section
catalog 405modules
3D Modeling 251BAMTEC 389bar reinforcement 298dimension lines 140draft 106, 127, 240key plan 267mesh reinforcement 370shell 287text 113
Oobserver 291office
library 121offset direction
single-tier walls 200offset polyline 241OLE objects 49
bitmaps 50editing 51embedding 49linking 49transparency 50
online help system 3open stirrup
enter automatically 308enter manually 300
openingsentering 217
outline auto-detect 152
Pparallel lines 109paths in Allplan 94patterns 79pen
for layers 182pen thickness
pen for architectural elements194
place automatically 310, 319,324
place In view 341placing bar reinforcement
440 Index Allplan 2005
bar-based 359freehand 360manually 302
placing excess mesh 388placing reinforcing bars
automatically 310, 319, 324batch mode 329hidden 332modifying display 332
planar polygonal surface 253plotting
layer set 423layout 420layouts 425requirements 412
point entry, advanced 57point snap 70polyline entry tools 78polyline sweep solid 256polylines
entering using advanced tools236
precast balcony unit 126applying hatching 150designing 127dimensioning 140
precision drawing 67print preview 155printing 155printing screen contents 156priority 196private
data path 122project
downloading training project188
path settings 176project attributes 414project organization
tips 180ProjectPilot
common approaches 162projects
creating 175selecting, switching 100
Qquick printout 155, 412quitting 39
Rrecess 375rectangle 109reference scale 108reinforce
with model (first method) 285reinforcement drawing 279reinforcement schedule
entering/modifying manually349
printing 348reinforcing
with model (second method)353
without model (third method)369
reinforcing bars3D placement 310
retrievingsymbols 364
Ssaving
component properties asfavorites 235
dimension line parameters143
favorite 143symbols to catalog 363
saving components as favorites88
scale 108screen
display 33section
creating 291delete clipping path 297displaying clipping path 292modifying area 339typical section 340
selecting 54drawing files 104entering a region 55
Manual Index 441
handles 56selecting elements 54
entering a region 55handles 56
shell drawing 189shortcut menu 22Slab opening
free-form 237smart symbols
components of 92defining 93properties 91using 90
Sources of informationtraining, coaching and project
support 5spacers 383span reinforcement
mesh 371reinforcing bars 312
Stairs 230standard views 33starter bars 318status bar 23stirrup
creating automatically 324stirrups
creating manually 356stretch entities 136support reinforcement
mesh 381surplus mesh placement 382symbol base point 123symbol catalogs 121symbols 89
general 121path 121retrieving 124, 364saving 363
Ttext 113
horizontal 113modifying parameters 119paragraph text 115setting parameters 114
text settings
general information 119title block
designing 106entering text 113using label style 424
toolbarbasic tools 98engineering 98, 284
toolbars 17basic tools 17configuration toolbars 18filter assistant 20flyouts 21point assistant 19, 74
tools 39training project on Internet 188transferring 3D elements to shell
view 289typical section 340
Uunit
of length 107user interface 16
Vvertical dimensioning 145view 33
converting to section 295label 297
viewports 208views 208views and sections 287
Wwall
offset direction 202three-dimensional 196
wallstwo-dimensional 241
windowsthree-dimensional 222two-dimensional 246
XXRef 52
editing 52restrictions 53
442 Index Allplan 2005
using 52 Zzooming 33